Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Convex Optimization

556 missions · 343 completed

Missions

Open213Completed343All556
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 4: Nonquadratic Multiplier Methods for Inequality Constraints Find an Optimal MultiplierResearch Paper

Motivation

Convex programs with inequality constraints arise when a decision must meet capacity, resource, or performance limits. Their Lagrange multipliers assign a price to each constraint. Finding an optimal multiplier gives a dual certificate and can guide a primal optimization method. Classical quadratic multiplier methods update these prices through a particular penalty. Eckstein's 1993 paper places a broader family of multiplier updates inside the theory of Bregman proximal point algorithms, allowing a nonquadratic function to shape each step (Eckstein 1993, §4.2).

The result here concerns the inequality constrained case, where multiplier vectors must be componentwise nonnegative. Eckstein identifies a monotone conjugate that incorporates this restriction into the primal penalty and proves that the resulting multiplier sequence converges to an optimal multiplier when one exists. The paper also studies primal limit points and the behavior when no optimal multiplier exists (Eckstein 1993, Theorem 7 and proof, pp. 216–219).

Setting

Let C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn be closed, nonempty, and convex. Let f,g1,…,gmf,g_1,\ldots,g_mf,g1​,…,gm​ be proper lower semicontinuous convex functions, finite on CCC. The primal problem is to minimize f(x)f(x)f(x) over x∈Cx\in Cx∈C subject to gi(x)≤0g_i(x)\le 0gi​(x)≤0 for every iii. Write g(x)=(g1(x),…,gm(x))g(x)=(g_1(x),\ldots,g_m(x))g(x)=(g1​(x),…,gm​(x)). A point solves the problem only when it lies in CCC, satisfies every inequality, and has no larger objective value than any other feasible point.

For a nonnegative multiplier ppp, the dual functional is d(p)=inf⁡x∈C{f(x)+⟨p,g(x)⟩}d(p)=\inf_{x\in C}\{f(x)+\langle p,g(x)\rangle\}d(p)=infx∈C​{f(x)+⟨p,g(x)⟩}; it equals −∞-\infty−∞ outside the nonnegative orthant. A multiplier p∗p^*p∗ is optimal when it maximizes ddd. The standing assumption that ddd is not identically −∞-\infty−∞ makes this dual functional a meaningful proper concave object (Eckstein 1993, p. 215).

A Bregman function hhh has an open zone SSS. It is continuously differentiable there, strictly convex and continuous on S‾\overline SS, and satisfies the boundedness and sequential conditions of Definition 1. Its Bregman distance is Dh(u,v)=h(u)−h(v)−⟨∇h(v),u−v⟩D_h(u,v)=h(u)-h(v)-\langle\nabla h(v),u-v\rangleDh​(u,v)=h(u)−h(v)−⟨∇h(v),u−v⟩, with u∈S‾u\in\overline Su∈S and v∈Sv\in Sv∈S. The zone contains the strict positive orthant, and the image of its gradient contains that orthant. Its monotone conjugate is h∗+(z)=sup⁡p≥0{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}h^{*+}(z)=\sup_{p\ge0}\{\langle p,z\rangle-h(p)\}h∗+(z)=supp≥0​{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}. Lemma 3 establishes that this function is finite and differentiable everywhere under these assumptions (Eckstein 1993, pp. 205, 215–216).

Given positive step sizes ckc_kck​ bounded away from zero, recursion (11) chooses xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1 as a minimizer over CCC of f(x)+ck−1h∗+(∇h(pk)+ckg(x))f(x)+c_k^{-1}h^{*+}(\nabla h(p^k)+c_kg(x))f(x)+ck−1​h∗+(∇h(pk)+ck​g(x)), then sets pk+1=∇h∗+(∇h(pk)+ckg(xk+1))p^{k+1}=\nabla h^{*+}(\nabla h(p^k)+c_kg(x^{k+1}))pk+1=∇h∗+(∇h(pk)+ck​g(xk+1)). The theorem assumes an infinite sequence conforming to these recursions; it does not assert that each minimizer exists for arbitrary data.

Formalization targets

Multiplier convergence

The goal is Eckstein's Theorem 7. If the dual problem has an optimal multiplier, then the multiplier sequence converges to one:

∃p∗∈argmax⁡dsuch thatpk⟶p∗.\exists p^*\in\operatorname*{argmax}d\quad\text{such that}\quad p^k\longrightarrow p^*.∃p∗∈argmaxdsuch thatpk⟶p∗.

When every gig_igi​ is continuous on CCC and SSS contains the closed nonnegative orthant, each subsequential limit of the primal iterates solves the constrained problem. Under the same zone condition, the multiplier sequence is unbounded if the dual has no optimal multiplier. The printed theorem says “if (10) has no solution” in this last clause; its proof on p. 218 establishes the no-optimal-multiplier condition, which is the version formalized here.

Supporting targets

The milestones include the representations of h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ in Lemma 2, the appendix results governing recession directions and the monotone conjugate, Lemma 3's global finiteness and differentiability, the subdifferential chain rule, and the Bregman proximal point result of Theorem 1. They also capture the paper's claims that recursion (11) is a Bregman proximal point run for ∂(−d)\partial(-d)∂(−d) and that primal limit points meet the feasibility, complementarity, and Lagrangian conditions.

Significance

The theorem supplies a convergence guarantee for nonquadratic methods of multipliers with inequality constraints. It separates the dual conclusion, which uses the strict positive orthant condition, from the primal limit and unboundedness conclusions, which additionally require the closed orthant to lie in the zone. This distinction lets a Bregman function whose zone excludes boundary points still yield dual convergence when optimal multipliers exist (Eckstein 1993, Theorem 7, pp. 216–218).

Eckstein proved this theorem on paper. The mission asks for machine checked proofs of its precise statements and the supporting results; the draft statements compile but their proofs remain open. A completed development would also provide reusable finite dimensional infrastructure for extended-real convex functions, monotone conjugates, Bregman distances, and convex-analytic multiplier conditions.

Difficulty

A direct appeal to ordinary proximal point convergence does not identify the update in (11) as a proximal step: the primal minimization uses h∗+h^{*+}h∗+, whereas the operator of interest is the subdifferential of the negative dual functional. The nonnegative orthant also introduces boundary behavior absent from the equality constrained case. The link requires precise conjugacy and subdifferential statements, including a globally finite monotone conjugate, before Theorem 1 can apply (Eckstein 1993, pp. 215–218). For primal limit points, the issue is to pass from optimality of each primal subproblem to feasibility, complementarity, and minimization of the limiting Lagrangian.

Formalization scope

Lean uses finite dimensional real inner product spaces for the general proximal point theorem and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m) for the primal and multiplier spaces. Functions that the paper regards as extended-valued are represented by EReal; their properness excludes −∞-\infty−∞. The infimum defining ddd and the supremum defining h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ remain extended-real operations, so an infinite value cannot silently become zero. Real values are extracted from h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ in recursion (11) only because Lemma 3 asserts finiteness everywhere.

The real function hhh is total in Lean but constrained only on S‾\overline SS; its gradient is evaluated only at points in SSS. Every multiplier iterate is explicitly in SSS. The initial primal value x0x^0x0 is unused by recursion (11). The Bregman proximal point recursion is represented by its equivalent inclusion (4), and a “limit point” is a subsequential limit. The sequential condition (vi) of Definition 1 is stated for xk∈S‾x^k\in\overline Sxk∈S, the natural first-argument domain of DhD_hDh​. The Appendix's essential strict convexity means strict convexity on convex subsets of the subdifferential domain. Its recession direction uses the stated limit inferior condition.

Lemma A4's printed unconditional claim that its composite GGG is proper lacks a finite-value witness. The formal statement keeps convexity of GGG unconditional and states properness at a point x0x_0x0​ where all inner functions and the outer function are finite; differentiability of the outer function there is expressed with local finiteness of its extended-real value. At a zero coefficient, its corresponding subgradient term contributes zero without requiring a subgradient to exist. These conditions expose rather than hide the domain issue. The formulation rules out an arbitrary multiplier sequence, an all-space supremum, or a minimization over infeasible points. Contributions proving the milestones, improving shared convex analysis libraries, and checking the boundary conventions are welcome.

Selected references

  • Jonathan Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 202–226, 1993. DOI:10.1287/moor.18.1.202.
15 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 2: Bregman Proximal Point Sequences Exist When im ∇h Is ℝⁿ, or Is Open and 0 ∈ im TResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point method seeks a zero of an operator by repeatedly solving an implicit equation. For a maximal monotone operator, the ordinary quadratic proximal step is available throughout a Hilbert space. Eckstein's 1993 paper replaces the quadratic penalty with a Bregman function, allowing a step to reflect the geometry of a constrained problem. Before convergence can be discussed, each implicit step must have a solution in the region where the Bregman gradient is defined. Eckstein, 1993, §§1–2 isolates that existence question in Theorem 4.

The theorem draws on the L-property and a range theorem attributed to Brézis and Haraux. Their results describe when the image of a sum of monotone operators is large enough to contain the inputs of a proximal step. The paper uses those results to obtain two practical sufficient conditions: a gradient whose image is the whole space, or an open gradient image together with a zero in the image of the operator. Eckstein, 1993, Theorems 2–4

Setting

Let HHH be a finite-dimensional real inner product space, representing the paper's Rn\mathbb R^nRn. An operator T:H→2HT:H\to2^HT:H→2H assigns a set of vectors to each point. It is monotone when ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0\langle x-y,u-v\rangle\ge0⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0 whenever u∈Txu\in Txu∈Tx and v∈Tyv\in Tyv∈Ty, and maximal monotone when its graph cannot be enlarged while preserving monotonicity. Its domain and image are dom⁡T={x:Tx≠∅}\operatorname{dom}T=\{x:Tx\ne\varnothing\}domT={x:Tx=∅} and im⁡T={u:∃x, u∈Tx}\operatorname{im}T=\{u:\exists x,\ u\in Tx\}imT={u:∃x, u∈Tx}.

Let S⊆HS\subseteq HS⊆H be open. A Bregman function with zone SSS is a real function hhh on Sˉ\bar SSˉ satisfying the six conditions of Definition 1: continuous differentiability on SSS, strict convexity and continuity on Sˉ\bar SSˉ, boundedness of two families of partial level sets, and two sequential conditions that relate convergence to its D-function

Dh(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,(x,y)∈Sˉ×S.D_h(x,y)=h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangle,\qquad (x,y)\in\bar S\times S.Dh​(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,(x,y)∈Sˉ×S.

The gradient is an operator with domain SSS and image ∇h(S)\nabla h(S)∇h(S). For positive step sizes ckc_kck​, a Bregman proximal point sequence is a sequence xk∈Sx^k\in Sxk∈S satisfying

1ck(∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1))∈T(xk+1)(k≥0).\frac{1}{c_k}\bigl(\nabla h(x^k)-\nabla h(x^{k+1})\bigr)\in T(x^{k+1})\quad(k\ge0).ck​1​(∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1))∈T(xk+1)(k≥0).

This is the inclusion form (4) of recursion (3). The expression ∇h+ckT\nabla h+c_kT∇h+ck​T is a sum of set-valued operators, and each step asks for a preimage of ∇h(xk)\nabla h(x^k)∇h(xk) under that sum. Eckstein, 1993, pp. 205–207

Formalization targets

The goal is Theorem 4. If TTT is maximal monotone, hhh is Bregman with zone S⊇dom⁡TS\supseteq\operatorname{dom}TS⊇domT, and either

im⁡∇h=H,orim⁡∇h is open and 0∈im⁡T,\operatorname{im}\nabla h=H, \qquad\text{or}\qquad \operatorname{im}\nabla h\text{ is open and }0\in\operatorname{im}T,im∇h=H,orim∇h is open and 0∈imT,

then every x0∈Sx^0\in Sx0∈S and every positive sequence (ck)(c_k)(ck​) admit an infinite Bregman proximal point sequence starting at x0x^0x0. The theorem asserts existence for every starting point in the zone, at every step. Eckstein, 1993, p. 209, Theorem 4

The milestones follow the cited results and the paper's proof: trimonotone operators and subdifferentials have the L-property (Theorem 2); the interior and closure of the image of a sum agree with those of the sum of images under the hypotheses of Theorem 3; the subdifferential and gradient sums agree on the domain of TTT and yield a maximal monotone sum; and the relevant gradient image lies in the image of ∇h+cT\nabla h+cT∇h+cT for every c>0c>0c>0. These targets provide the range statement needed for the infinite recursion. Eckstein, 1993, pp. 208–209

Significance

Theorem 4 certifies that the nonlinear proximal point recursion is well defined from any admissible starting point under either range condition. Without this existence statement, a convergence theorem for sequences satisfying the recursion leaves open whether a sequence can be generated. Its range conditions also distinguish Bregman geometries whose gradient covers the whole space from geometries with a smaller but open gradient image. Eckstein, 1993, p. 209

The mathematical result is proved in the paper; the work here is to formalize its definitions, the Brézis–Haraux statements cited there, and the existence theorem in Lean. The milestone statements are open proof obligations in the draft, not claims of completed machine-checked proofs. The operator vocabulary and range theorem can be reused for other implicit algorithms involving sums of monotone operators.

Difficulty

Knowing that TTT and ∇h\nabla h∇h are monotone does not by itself show that a prescribed ∇h(xk)\nabla h(x^k)∇h(xk) belongs to im⁡(∇h+ckT)\operatorname{im}(\nabla h+c_kT)im(∇h+ck​T). Even maximality of TTT alone gives no direct description of that image. The hard point is the range of the sum on the zone of hhh, especially when ∇h(S)\nabla h(S)∇h(S) is a proper subset of HHH. Theorem 3 supplies an interior and closure comparison, but its domain, maximality, and L-property hypotheses must all be established for the particular operators in Theorem 4. Eckstein, 1993, pp. 208–209

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses a finite-dimensional real inner product space HHH, set-valued operators H→Set⁡HH\to\operatorname{Set}HH→SetH, and Mathlib's gradient on the open zone SSS. The image of ∇h\nabla h∇h is precisely ∇h(S)\nabla h(S)∇h(S); values of the total Lean gradient outside SSS do not enter it. The function h:H→Rh:H\to\mathbb Rh:H→R is total for Lean's type system, but only values on Sˉ\bar SSˉ matter. Its extension by +∞+\infty+∞ outside Sˉ\bar SSˉ is EReal-valued, and the subdifferential uses the published convex-analysis predicate. The L-property uses boundedness below in R\mathbb RR, matching the paper's strict lower bound above −∞-\infty−∞.

Recursion (3) is represented by its equivalent inclusion (4), with every iterate explicitly in SSS. The paper leaves the positive step sizes implicit in Theorem 4; the goal quantifies over all such sequences and imposes no convergence-specific lower bound on them. Condition (vi) of Definition 1 is applied to first arguments in Sˉ\bar SSˉ, the stated natural domain of DhD_hDh​. Trimonotonicity is the three-point cyclic condition used by Brézis and Haraux. A one-step solution, a sequence with an arbitrary starting point chosen by the prover, or an image taken over all of HHH would not establish this target.

The development needs convex subdifferentials, maximal monotonicity, maximality of appropriate sums, and the Brézis–Haraux range result. Contributions that prove these milestones or add reusable range lemmas are within scope; an optional formalization of the existence part of Theorem 5 is outside the core path.

Selected references

  • J. Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 202–226, 1993. DOI.
  • H. Brézis and A. Haraux, Image d'une somme d'opérateurs monotones et applications, Israel Journal of Mathematics 23, 165–186, 1976. DOI.
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Cooperative Fuzzy Games 4: The Fuzzy Core of an Exchange Economy Coincides with Its Set of Walras EquilibriaResearch Paper

Motivation

The core of an exchange economy is the set of allocations that no group of consumers can improve upon by trading only among themselves. The Walras equilibria (competitive equilibria) are the allocations supported by a price system at which every consumer maximizes preference on a budget set. Every Walras equilibrium is in the core, but for a fixed finite economy the core is usually much larger. Edgeworth (1881) conjectured that the core shrinks to the competitive allocations as the number of traders grows; Debreu and Scarf (1963) proved this for replica economies, and Aumann (1964) proved exact equality for an atomless continuum of traders.

Jean-Pierre Aubin's Cooperative Fuzzy Games (Math. Oper. Res. 6 (1981) 1–13) gives a third route to the same conclusion, with a fixed finite number of consumers. Coalitions are allowed to be fuzzy: a consumer may join with any rate of participation between 0 and 1. Once all fuzzy coalitions may block, the core of the economy, now called the fuzzy core, is exactly the set of Walras equilibria (Theorem 4.1, p. 6). The paper presents this as a slight modification of the Debreu–Scarf theorem; in Remark 4.2 it observes that Debreu–Scarf's replica coalitions correspond to the rational points of the cube [0,1]n[0,1]^n[0,1]n.

This mission formalizes §4 of the paper. It is the fourth mission of a series on the paper; the others treat the cores of fuzzy games with and without side payments and the values of smooth fuzzy games.

Setting

There are nnn consumers i∈N={1,…,n}i \in N = \{1,\dots,n\}i∈N={1,…,n} and lll commodities. Consumer iii consumes bundles in R+l\mathbb{R}^l_+R+l​, ranks them by a preference relation ≽i\succcurlyeq_i≽i​ (with strict part ≻i\succ_i≻i​), and owns a set Y(i)⊂RlY(i) \subset \mathbb{R}^lY(i)⊂Rl of possible initial endowments. Each Y(i)Y(i)Y(i) is closed, convex and comprehensive: whenever y∈Y(i)y \in Y(i)y∈Y(i) and z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, also y−z∈Y(i)y - z \in Y(i)y−z∈Y(i).

A fuzzy coalition is a vector τ∈[0,1]n\tau \in [0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n; τi\tau_iτi​ is the rate at which consumer iii participates, and Aτ={i:τi>0}A_\tau = \{i : \tau_i > 0\}Aτ​={i:τi​>0} is the set of participants. The coalition τ\tauτ disposes of the endowments

Y(τ)=∑i∈Nτi Y(i),Y(\tau) = \sum_{i \in N} \tau_i\, Y(i),Y(τ)=i∈N∑​τi​Y(i),

and its allocations are the families xτ=(xτi)i∈Aτx_\tau = (x_\tau^i)_{i \in A_\tau}xτ​=(xτi​)i∈Aτ​​ of bundles xτi∈R+lx_\tau^i \in \mathbb{R}^l_+xτi​∈R+l​ with ∑iτixτi∈Y(τ)\sum_i \tau_i x_\tau^i \in Y(\tau)∑i​τi​xτi​∈Y(τ); this set is X(τ)X(\tau)X(τ). The allocations of the whole economy are X(N)=X(τN)X(N) = X(\tau^N)X(N)=X(τN), τN=(1,…,1)\tau^N = (1,\dots,1)τN=(1,…,1).

An allocation x∈X(N)x \in X(N)x∈X(N) is in the fuzzy core if there is no nonzero fuzzy coalition τ\tauτ and allocation xτ∈X(τ)x_\tau \in X(\tau)xτ​∈X(τ) with xτi≻ixix_\tau^i \succ_i x^ixτi​≻i​xi for every i∈Aτi \in A_\taui∈Aτ​.

The income of consumer iii at prices p∈Rlp \in \mathbb{R}^lp∈Rl is ri(p)=sup⁡y∈Y(i)p⋅yr_i(p) = \sup_{y \in Y(i)} p\cdot yri​(p)=supy∈Y(i)​p⋅y, and the budget set is Bi(p)={x∈R+l:p⋅x≤ri(p)}B_i(p) = \{x \in \mathbb{R}^l_+ : p \cdot x \le r_i(p)\}Bi​(p)={x∈R+l​:p⋅x≤ri​(p)}. An allocation xˉ∈X(N)\bar x \in X(N)xˉ∈X(N) is a Walras equilibrium if some price pˉ∈Rl\bar p \in \mathbb{R}^lpˉ​∈Rl satisfies, for every iii,

pˉ⋅xˉi=ri(pˉ)andxˉi≽ix  for all x∈Bi(pˉ).\bar p \cdot \bar x^i = r_i(\bar p) \qquad\text{and}\qquad \bar x^i \succcurlyeq_i x \ \text{ for all } x \in B_i(\bar p).pˉ​⋅xˉi=ri​(pˉ​)andxˉi≽i​x  for all x∈Bi​(pˉ​).

Assumption (1) of §4 requires each preference to be continuous and convex, with x≻iy⇒αx+(1−α)y≻iyx \succ_i y \Rightarrow \alpha x + (1-\alpha) y \succ_i yx≻i​y⇒αx+(1−α)y≻i​y for α∈ ]0,1[\alpha \in\, ]0,1[α∈]0,1[; no consumer to be satiated; and each Y(i)Y(i)Y(i) to contain a vector with all coordinates strictly positive.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

Under assumption (1),

fuzzy core  =  {Walras equilibria}.\text{fuzzy core} \;=\; \{\text{Walras equilibria}\}.fuzzy core={Walras equilibria}.

Milestones, from the proof of Theorem 4.1

  1. Every Walras equilibrium belongs to the fuzzy core.
  2. For an allocation xˉ∈X(N)\bar x \in X(N)xˉ∈X(N), each set Q(i)=Y(i)−{x∈R+l:x≻ixˉi}Q(i) = Y(i) - \{x \in \mathbb{R}^l_+ : x \succ_i \bar x^i\}Q(i)=Y(i)−{x∈R+l​:x≻i​xˉi} is nonempty.
  3. If xˉ\bar xxˉ belongs to the fuzzy core, then
0∉co⁡(⋃i=1nQ(i)).0 \notin \operatorname{co}\Big(\bigcup_{i=1}^n Q(i)\Big).0∈/co(i=1⋃n​Q(i)).

The remaining step of the paper, from milestone 3 to the existence of the equilibrium price, is stated there only as "by known arguments" and is left to the solver as part of the goal.

Significance

The result. Theorem 4.1 is a core equivalence theorem for an economy with finitely many consumers and no replication or continuum of traders. It identifies the competitive allocations as exactly the allocations that are stable against partial coalitions. It also makes visible which coalitions matter: Remark 4.1 attributes the equivalence to the fact that all fuzzy coalitions are allowed to form, so that the set of coalitions is convex. The same fuzzy-coalition device underlies the nonemptiness results for cores of fuzzy games in §5–§7 of the paper.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, in one paragraph that defers its final step to "known arguments". To our knowledge neither the theorem nor the Debreu–Scarf or Aumann core equivalence theorems have been formalized in Lean. A complete development provides a reusable model of an exchange economy with preference relations and comprehensive endowment sets, a checked argument from separation to equilibrium prices, and a template for the classical core equivalence theorems.

Difficulty

The inclusion of the Walras equilibria in the fuzzy core is a budget computation. The converse is the content of the theorem: from the mere absence of improving fuzzy coalitions, a single price vector must be produced that works for all consumers simultaneously. Separating consumer by consumer gives one price per consumer, not a common one, so the coalitional structure has to enter before any price exists. Once a candidate price is available, it still has to be shown nonnegative, each equilibrium bundle has to exhaust its owner's income, and no bundle in a budget set may be strictly preferred; each of these uses a different part of assumption (1), and the paper leaves all three to "known arguments". The incomes ri(p)r_i(p)ri​(p) may be +∞+\infty+∞ for prices with negative coordinates, so finiteness at the equilibrium price is part of the conclusion, not an assumption.

Formalization scope

Consumers are Fin n, commodities Fin l; an allocation is a function Fin n → Fin l → ℝ, a price a vector Fin l → ℝ, and p⋅y=∑kpkykp \cdot y = \sum_k p_k y_kp⋅y=∑k​pk​yk​. A single definitions file (FuzzyGames.Walras.Basic) holds the economy, its assumptions, Y(τ)Y(\tau)Y(τ), X(τ)X(\tau)X(τ), the fuzzy core, incomes, budget sets, Walras equilibria and the sets Q(i)Q(i)Q(i).

The formalization commits to the following readings, each recorded in the items' Formalization Notes:

  • Complete preferences. The paper's "preference preordering" is read, as in Debreu's usage, as a reflexive, transitive and complete relation on R+l\mathbb{R}^l_+R+l​. The relation is a predicate on Rl\mathbb{R}^lRl, but every assumption and every use is restricted to R+l\mathbb{R}^l_+R+l​.
  • Continuity means closed upper and lower contour sets in R+l\mathbb{R}^l_+R+l​; convexity means convex upper contour sets, plus the condition of (1)(i).
  • Assumption (1)(i) is printed with x≽yx \succcurlyeq yx≽y in the premise, which fails at x=yx = yx=y; it is stated with x≻yx \succ yx≻y.
  • Blocking is strict and by nonzero coalitions. The fuzzy-core definition is printed with xτi≽xix_\tau^i \succcurlyeq x^ixτi​≽xi; the proof uses ≻\succ≻, and the weak version would let every allocation block itself. The coalition τ=0\tau = 0τ=0 is excluded, since its condition over Aτ=∅A_\tau = \emptysetAτ​=∅ is vacuous.
  • Dummy coordinates. An allocation of τ\tauτ is a full family of nnn bundles; those with τi=0\tau_i = 0τi​=0 are multiplied by 000, unconstrained and never compared.
  • Y(τ)Y(\tau)Y(τ) is Mathlib's pointwise Minkowski sum of scaled sets.
  • Incomes take values in the extended reals (EReal), so that ri(p)=+∞r_i(p) = +\inftyri​(p)=+∞ is represented and never replaced by a default value.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the assumptions are satisfiable, and a sorry-free check (one consumer, one commodity, x≽y  ⟺  x≥yx \succcurlyeq y \iff x \ge yx≽y⟺x≥y, Y(1)=(−∞,1]Y(1) = (-\infty, 1]Y(1)=(−∞,1]) verifies them together with a Walras equilibrium, so neither side of the goal is empty by construction.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a separation-to-prices lemma for comprehensive endowment sets, and general facts about complete continuous convex preferences on R+l\mathbb{R}^l_+R+l​, which are reusable for any general equilibrium development.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Aubin, Cooperative fuzzy games, Mathematics of Operations Research 6(1) (1981) 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.1.1
  • G. Debreu, H. Scarf, A limit theorem on the core of an economy, International Economic Review 4(3) (1963) 235–246. https://doi.org/10.2307/2525290
  • R. J. Aumann, Markets with a continuum of traders, Econometrica 32 (1964) 39–50. https://doi.org/10.2307/1913732
  • G. Debreu, Theory of Value, Cowles Foundation Monograph 17, Yale University Press, 1959.
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 3: If f Is Finite at x and g Is Finite and Continuous at Ax, Then (P) Is Stably Set and inf (P(z)) Is Continuous Near z = 0Research Paper

Motivation

A convex program is useful in practice only if its optimal value responds reasonably to small changes in the data. Lagrangian and Fenchel duality theory makes this precise: the dual problem attains its optimum and has no duality gap exactly when the primal value function does not fall off infinitely steeply under small perturbations. A constraint qualification is a checkable condition on the data that guarantees this good behaviour; Slater's condition (a strictly feasible point) is the best-known example in finite dimensions.

R. T. Rockafellar's 1967 paper Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions (Pacific J. Math. 21 (1967) 167–187) develops Fenchel-type duality for the problem of minimizing f(x)−g(Ax)f(x) - g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) in general locally convex spaces. It introduces the notion of a stably set problem, shows that stability is equivalent to strong duality with an attained dual optimum (its Theorem 3), and gives in Theorem 1 a general sufficient condition for stability. Theorem 1 is the infinite-dimensional analogue of Slater's condition and is the form in which the result is usually applied: one exhibits a single point where fff is finite and ggg is finite and continuous.

Timeline. Fenchel (1951) proved the duality theorem for A=IA = IA=I in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn under relative-interior conditions. Brøndsted (1964) and Moreau (1966–67) extended conjugate duality to paired locally convex spaces. Rockafellar's 1967 paper (this mission) added the linear map AAA, the perturbation function hhh, the notion of stability, and Theorem 1. The perturbational approach was later systematized in Rockafellar's Conjugate Duality and Optimization (SIAM, 1974).

Setting

Let EEE and FFF be real locally convex Hausdorff topological vector spaces and A:E→FA : E \to FA:E→F a continuous linear map. Let f:E→[−∞,+∞]f : E \to [-\infty, +\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] and g:F→[−∞,+∞]g : F \to [-\infty, +\infty]g:F→[−∞,+∞].

  • fff is convex if its epigraph {(x,μ)∣x∈E,μ∈R,μ≥f(x)}\{(x, \mu) \mid x \in E, \mu \in \mathbb{R}, \mu \ge f(x)\}{(x,μ)∣x∈E,μ∈R,μ≥f(x)} is a convex subset of E×RE \times \mathbb{R}E×R; it is proper if f(x)>−∞f(x) > -\inftyf(x)>−∞ for all xxx and f(x)<+∞f(x) < +\inftyf(x)<+∞ for some xxx. ggg is concave if −g-g−g is convex, and proper concave if g<+∞g < +\inftyg<+∞ everywhere and g>−∞g > -\inftyg>−∞ somewhere.
  • Throughout, fff is lower semicontinuous proper convex and ggg is upper semicontinuous proper concave. Their effective domains are C={x∣f(x)<+∞}C = \{x \mid f(x) < +\infty\}C={x∣f(x)<+∞} and D={y∣g(y)>−∞}D = \{y \mid g(y) > -\infty\}D={y∣g(y)>−∞}.
  • The primal problem is
(P)minimize f(x)−g(Ax) over x∈E,(P) \qquad \text{minimize } f(x) - g(Ax) \text{ over } x \in E,(P)minimize f(x)−g(Ax) over x∈E,

and its perturbations are (P(z))(P(z))(P(z)): minimize f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x) - g(Ax - z)f(x)−g(Ax−z), for z∈Fz \in Fz∈F. The perturbation function is h(z)=inf⁡(P(z))=inf⁡x{f(x)−g(Ax−z)}∈[−∞,+∞]h(z) = \inf (P(z)) = \inf_x \{ f(x) - g(Ax - z) \} \in [-\infty, +\infty]h(z)=inf(P(z))=infx​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)}∈[−∞,+∞], so h(0)=inf⁡(P)h(0) = \inf (P)h(0)=inf(P). (P)(P)(P) is consistent if h(0)<+∞h(0) < +\inftyh(0)<+∞.

  • When h(0)h(0)h(0) is finite, the directional derivative is h′(0;z)=lim⁡ε↓0[h(εz)−h(0)]/εh'(0; z) = \lim_{\varepsilon \downarrow 0} [h(\varepsilon z) - h(0)]/\varepsilonh′(0;z)=limε↓0​[h(εz)−h(0)]/ε.
  • (P)(P)(P) is unstably set if h(0)h(0)h(0) is finite and every neighbourhood of 000 contains vectors zzz with h′(0;z)h'(0; z)h′(0;z) a negative number of arbitrarily large magnitude (−∞-\infty−∞ included). (P)(P)(P) is stably set if it is consistent but not unstably set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 175)

Suppose there exists x∈Ex \in Ex∈E such that fff is finite at xxx and ggg is finite and continuous at AxAxAx. Then

(P) is stably setandthere is a neighbourhood U of 0 on which z↦inf⁡(P(z)) is continuous.(P) \text{ is stably set} \quad\text{and}\quad \text{there is a neighbourhood } U \text{ of } 0 \text{ on which } z \mapsto \inf (P(z)) \text{ is continuous}.(P) is stably setandthere is a neighbourhood U of 0 on which z↦inf(P(z)) is continuous.

The neighbourhood UUU is left unspecified, as in the paper.

Milestones (in the order the proof uses them)

  1. (4.4) {z∣h(z)<+∞}={Ax−y∣f(x)<+∞, g(y)>−∞}=A(C)−D\{z \mid h(z) < +\infty\} = \{Ax - y \mid f(x) < +\infty,\ g(y) > -\infty\} = A(C) - D{z∣h(z)<+∞}={Ax−y∣f(x)<+∞, g(y)>−∞}=A(C)−D.
  2. (4.5) A(C)A(C)A(C) meets int⁡D\operatorname{int} DintD, and 0∈A(C)−int⁡D⊆int⁡(A(C)−D)0 \in A(C) - \operatorname{int} D \subseteq \operatorname{int}(A(C) - D)0∈A(C)−intD⊆int(A(C)−D).
  3. Epigraph of hhh has interior (p. 176): the hypograph G={(y,μ)∣g(y)≥μ>−∞}G = \{(y, \mu) \mid g(y) \ge \mu > -\infty\}G={(y,μ)∣g(y)≥μ>−∞} has nonempty interior, (Ax,λ)−G(Ax, \lambda) - G(Ax,λ)−G lies in the epigraph of hhh for every (x,λ)(x, \lambda)(x,λ) in the epigraph of fff, and so the epigraph of hhh has nonempty interior.
  4. Continuity on the interior of the domain (p. 176): 0∈int⁡{h<+∞}0 \in \operatorname{int}\{h < +\infty\}0∈int{h<+∞} and hhh is continuous there.
  5. (4.6) For a convex hhh with h(0)h(0)h(0) finite: h(z)≥h(0)+h′(0;z)h(z) \ge h(0) + h'(0; z)h(z)≥h(0)+h′(0;z) and h′(0;z)≥−h′(0;−z)h'(0; z) \ge -h'(0; -z)h′(0;z)≥−h′(0;−z) for all zzz.

Significance

The result. Combined with the paper's Theorem 3, Theorem 1 yields: if fff is finite at some xxx where ggg is finite and continuous at AxAxAx, then inf⁡(P)=max⁡(P∗)\inf (P) = \max (P^*)inf(P)=max(P∗), with the dual maximum attained. This is the standard sufficient condition for Fenchel–Rockafellar duality in infinite dimensions, used in calculus of variations, optimal control, and the convex analysis of integral functionals. The continuity half of Theorem 1 says that the optimal value depends continuously on translations of the constraint data near the unperturbed problem, a basic sensitivity statement.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved (1967) and appears in many textbooks, but there is no machine-checked version on this platform. Mathlib contains continuity criteria for real-valued convex functions on open sets of normed or finite-dimensional spaces (ConvexOn.continuousOn_tfae, ConvexOn.continuousOn_interior), but nothing for extended-real-valued convex functions on general topological vector spaces, no perturbation function, and no notion of a stably set problem. A complete development would provide reusable infrastructure: the epigraph-interior continuity criterion for [−∞,+∞][-\infty, +\infty][−∞,+∞]-valued convex functions and the elementary calculus of one-sided directional derivatives.

Difficulty

The obvious argument says: ggg is continuous at AxAxAx, so h(z)≤f(x)−g(Ax−z)h(z) \le f(x) - g(Ax - z)h(z)≤f(x)−g(Ax−z) is bounded above near 000, hence hhh is continuous at 000 and its directional derivatives are bounded. Two steps of this fail without care. First, the passage from "bounded above near a point" to "continuous" requires convexity of hhh (Lemma 2 of the paper, proved in the companion mission) and a continuity criterion valid in an arbitrary topological vector space, with values in [−∞,+∞][-\infty, +\infty][−∞,+∞]; the normed-space proofs in Mathlib do not apply. Second, hhh may take the value −∞-\infty−∞, and the derivative may be −∞-\infty−∞ in some directions; the bookkeeping of extended-real arithmetic (where (+∞)+(−∞)(+\infty) + (-\infty)(+∞)+(−∞) is not defined mathematically and is given a junk value in Lean) has to be done honestly. Finally, upper bounds on h′(0;⋅)h'(0;\cdot)h′(0;⋅) must be converted into lower bounds, which is where the second inequality of (4.6) enters; an upper bound alone does not give stability.

Formalization scope

All values are in Lean's EReal. Convexity is convexity of the epigraph with real second coordinate (the paper's definition, p. 170); concavity is convexity of −g-g−g. Properness is stated as in the paper. The perturbation function is the EReal infimum ⨅ x, f x - g (A x - z); under properness the undefined form (+∞)−(+∞)(+\infty) - (+\infty)(+∞)−(+∞) never arises. The directional derivative (4.3) is the lower limit of the difference quotient along ε→0+\varepsilon \to 0^+ε→0+, which equals the paper's limit whenever it exists (always, for convex hhh with h(0)h(0)h(0) finite). "Unstably set" quantifies over all neighbourhoods of 000 and all real MMM, with h′(0;z)<−Mh'(0;z) < -Mh′(0;z)<−M allowing −∞-\infty−∞. "Stably set" is h(0)<+∞h(0) < +\inftyh(0)<+∞ together with "not unstably set", so inf⁡(P)=−∞\inf (P) = -\inftyinf(P)=−∞ is stably set, as the paper says on p. 176. Continuity is with respect to the order topology of EReal, and "continuous at AxAxAx" is continuity of ggg itself at that point, not of its restriction to DDD.

The paper's standing setting (§3) includes dual spaces E∗,F∗E^*, F^*E∗,F∗, the adjoint A∗A^*A∗ and the conjugates f∗,g∗f^*, g^*f∗,g∗. Neither Theorem 1 nor its proof uses them, so they are omitted and the theorem is stated for every pair of real locally convex Hausdorff spaces, which includes every paired setting. The lower and upper semicontinuity of fff and ggg are standing hypotheses of the paper and are kept, although the proof does not use them. Inequality (4.6) is stated for an arbitrary convex function finite at 000, the generality in which the paper invokes it. No statement was repaired.

A definition of "stably set" that already presumed finiteness or continuity of hhh near 000, or that tested the derivative only in a fixed set of directions, would make the first conclusion of Theorem 1 trivial; the definition used here is the paper's p. 175 definition verbatim, applied to an arbitrary function hhh. The definitions are local to this mission; the companion missions on Theorem 3 and Theorem 6 of the same paper define the same objects in their own namespaces. Contributions are welcome on the milestones in any order, and in particular on a general continuity criterion for extended-real-valued convex functions on topological vector spaces, which is reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and stability in extremum problems involving convex functions, Pacific J. Math. 21 (1967) 167–187. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167
  • A. Brøndsted, Conjugate convex functions in topological vector spaces, Mat.-Fys. Medd. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. 34 (1964), no. 2.
  • W. Fenchel, Convex Cones, Sets and Functions, lecture notes, Princeton University, 1951.
  • J. J. Moreau, Fonctionnelles convexes, Séminaire Leray, Collège de France, 1966–67.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Programming with Set-Inclusive Constraints and Applications to Inexact Linear Programming: The Set-Inclusive LP Has the Same Feasible Set as the LP of Support FunctionalsResearch Paper

Motivation

A linear program max⁡c⋅x\max c\cdot xmaxc⋅x subject to Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b, x≥0x\ge 0x≥0 assumes that the constraint matrix AAA is known exactly. In practice the columns of AAA — the activity vectors, describing how much of each resource one unit of activity jjj consumes — are estimates. A. L. Soyster's 1973 technical note in Operations Research (doi:10.1287/opre.21.5.1154) asked what a decision xxx should satisfy if every activity vector is known only to lie in a given convex set, and the decision has to be feasible for every possible realisation. He called this inexact linear programming, a term he attributes to K. O. Kortanek.

The note is the earliest formulation of what is now called robust linear optimization. Its answer — replace each uncertain column by its coordinatewise worst case — is the "Soyster model" that later work on robust optimization takes as its point of departure: Ben-Tal and Nemirovski (Math. Oper. Res. 1998; Math. Program. 2000) and Bertsimas and Sim (Oper. Res. 2004) both introduce their less conservative uncertainty sets as alternatives to it.

Setting

Fix integers m,n≥0m,n\ge0m,n≥0. Vectors in Rm\mathbb R^mRm are compared componentwise. For a set S⊆RmS\subseteq\mathbb R^mS⊆Rm and a scalar ttt, tS={ta:a∈S}tS=\{ta: a\in S\}tS={ta:a∈S}, and the sum of sets is Minkowski addition, S+T={s+t:s∈S, t∈T}S+T=\{s+t: s\in S,\ t\in T\}S+T={s+t:s∈S, t∈T}.

Let K1,…,Kn⊆RmK_1,\dots,K_n\subseteq\mathbb R^mK1​,…,Kn​⊆Rm be nonempty convex activity sets and K⊆RmK\subseteq\mathbb R^mK⊆Rm a nonempty convex resource set. Problem (I) is

sup⁡ c⋅xsubject tox1K1+x2K2+⋯+xnKn⊆K,xj≥0,\sup\ c\cdot x\quad\text{subject to}\quad x_1K_1+x_2K_2+\cdots+x_nK_n\subseteq K,\quad x_j\ge0,sup c⋅xsubject tox1​K1​+x2​K2​+⋯+xn​Kn​⊆K,xj​≥0,

and X⊆RnX\subseteq\mathbb R^nX⊆Rn denotes its set of feasible xxx. Problem (Ib) is the special case K=K(b)={y∈Rm:y≤b}K=K(b)=\{y\in\mathbb R^m: y\le b\}K=K(b)={y∈Rm:y≤b} for a right-hand side b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm.

The support functional of a set SSS is δ∗(y∣S)=sup⁡a∈Sy⋅a\delta^*(y\mid S)=\sup_{a\in S}y\cdot aδ∗(y∣S)=supa∈S​y⋅a, a value in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞]. With eie_iei​ the iii-th unit vector, the auxiliary matrix Aˉ\bar AAˉ is the m×nm\times nm×n matrix with entries

aˉij=δ∗(ei∣Kj)=sup⁡aj∈Kjaij,\bar a_{ij}=\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)=\sup_{a_j\in K_j}a_{ij},aˉij​=δ∗(ei​∣Kj​)=aj​∈Kj​sup​aij​,

defined when all of these are finite, and LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) is the linear program max⁡c⋅x\max c\cdot xmaxc⋅x subject to Aˉx≤b\bar Ax\le bAˉx≤b, x≥0x\ge0x≥0. Finally MMM is the set of m×nm\times nm×n matrices (a1,…,an)(a_1,\dots,a_n)(a1​,…,an​) whose jjj-th column lies in KjK_jKj​.

In the application, the activity sets are Euclidean balls Kj={a∈Rm:∥a−aj∥2≤ρj}K_j=\{a\in\mathbb R^m:\|a-a_j\|_2\le\rho_j\}Kj​={a∈Rm:∥a−aj​∥2​≤ρj​} around nominal columns aja_jaj​ of a matrix A0A_0A0​, with radii ρj≥0\rho_j\ge0ρj​≥0.

Formalization targets

Goal: the THEOREM (p. 1156)

Assume every KjK_jKj​ is nonempty and convex and δ∗(ei∣Kj)<∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)<\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)<∞ for all i,ji,ji,j. Then

{x:x feasible for (Ib)}={x:Aˉx≤b, x≥0},\{x : x\ \text{feasible for (Ib)}\}=\{x : \bar Ax\le b,\ x\ge 0\},{x:x feasible for (Ib)}={x:Aˉx≤b, x≥0},

and for every objective ccc, the optimal solutions of (Ib) and of LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) coincide.

Milestones

  1. Feasibility for (I) is equivalent to x≥0x\ge0x≥0 and ∑jxjaj∈K\sum_j x_ja_j\in K∑j​xj​aj​∈K for every choice aj∈Kja_j\in K_jaj​∈Kj​ (p. 1154).
  2. LEMMA (p. 1155): XXX is convex.
  3. If δ∗(ei∣Kj)=∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)=\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)=∞ for some iii, every feasible xxx of (Ib) has xj=0x_j=0xj​=0 (p. 1155).
  4. Compact activity sets have δ∗(ei∣Kj)<∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)<\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)<∞ (p. 1156).
  5. xxx is feasible for (Ib) iff Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b for every A∈MA\in MA∈M and x≥0x\ge0x≥0 (p. 1156).
  6. Every A∈MA\in MA∈M satisfies A≤AˉA\le\bar AA≤Aˉ entrywise (proof of THEOREM).
  7. Feasible for LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) implies feasible for (Ib) (proof of THEOREM).
  8. Feasible for (Ib) implies ∑jxjsup⁡aj∈Kjaij≤bi\sum_j x_j\sup_{a_j\in K_j}a_{ij}\le b_i∑j​xj​supaj​∈Kj​​aij​≤bi​ for every iii, i.e. feasible for LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) (proof of THEOREM).
  9. For Euclidean balls, δ∗(ei∣Kj)=aij+ρj\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)=a_{ij}+\rho_jδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)=aij​+ρj​, so aˉj=aj+ρje\bar a_j=a_j+\rho_jeaˉj​=aj​+ρj​e with eee the all-ones vector (p. 1157).
  10. Inexact LP over balls: (Ib) has the same feasible and optimal solutions as max⁡c⋅x\max c\cdot xmaxc⋅x subject to ∑jxj(aj+ρje)≤b\sum_j x_j(a_j+\rho_je)\le b∑j​xj​(aj​+ρj​e)≤b, x≥0x\ge0x≥0 (p. 1157).

Significance

The THEOREM turns a semi-infinite constraint — one linear inequality for every matrix in MMM, of which there are typically uncountably many — into a single linear program of the original size, whose data are the support functionals of the activity sets. Any LP solver then solves the uncertain problem. The hypersphere corollary shows the cost of this guarantee concretely: every entry of column jjj is inflated by the full radius ρj\rho_jρj​, which is why the model is called conservative and why later robust-optimization work introduced ellipsoidal and budgeted uncertainty sets as less conservative alternatives. The LEMMA classifies (I) as a convex program in general, for resource sets that are not half-space intersections.

The results are proved in the paper and are standard. To our knowledge they have no machine-checked proof in Lean or Mathlib. The mission produces a formal statement of the set-inclusive constraint as an actual Minkowski-sum inclusion, the support-functional reduction with its finiteness hypotheses made explicit, and the Euclidean-ball computation — a base that robust-counterpart results for other uncertainty sets can be compared against.

Difficulty

The individual arguments are short; the work is in the bookkeeping that the paper leaves implicit. The step from "for every A∈MA\in MA∈M" to Aˉ\bar AAˉ uses that the supremum of a sum of independent terms is the sum of suprema, which needs every KjK_jKj​ nonempty and the scalars xjx_jxj​ nonnegative; with an empty activity set the Minkowski sum is empty and every x≥0x\ge0x≥0 becomes feasible. The support functional is valued in the extended reals, and its conversion to a real matrix entry is exact only under the finiteness assumption, which the paper secures by deleting columns. The ball computation needs the Euclidean norm and its dual characterisation of the maximum of a coordinate over a ball.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors are Fin m → ℝ and Fin n → ℝ, with indices 0,…,m−10,\dots,m-10,…,m−1 in place of 1,…,m1,\dots,m1,…,m; the order on vectors is componentwise.
  • Feasibility of (I) is the Minkowski-sum inclusion (∑ j, x j • K j) ⊆ R (pointwise set operations) together with x≥0x\ge0x≥0. It is not defined as "for every choice aj∈Kja_j\in K_jaj​∈Kj​", which would make milestones 1 and 5 trivial, and Aˉ\bar AAˉ is constructed from the KjK_jKj​, not an arbitrary matrix dominating MMM, which would make the goal trivial.
  • δ∗\delta^*δ∗ is valued in EReal. The entries of Aˉ\bar AAˉ are its real conversions, so every statement mentioning Aˉ\bar AAˉ assumes Kj≠∅K_j\neq\emptysetKj​=∅ and δ∗(ei∣Kj)<∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)<\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)<∞, the paper's standing assumptions (pp. 1154–1156). Convexity of the KjK_jKj​ is also kept as a hypothesis wherever the paper has it, although only the LEMMA uses convexity (of KKK).
  • An optimal solution is a feasible point attaining the maximum of c⋅xc\cdot xc⋅x; the paper writes sup⁡\supsup and does not discuss attainment. Because the goal identifies the feasible sets, the two problems also have equal suprema.
  • Hyperspheres use the Euclidean norm (EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m)), not the sup norm of Fin m → ℝ, with radii ρj≥0\rho_j\ge0ρj​≥0.
  • The support functional restates the published FenchelRobust.Counterpart.supportFun with the same body.
  • Not formalized: Magnanti's extension to ≥\ge≥ and === rows (p. 1156), and the remarks on (GLP) and stochastic programming. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of an EReal statement equating the optimal values, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. L. Soyster, Convex Programming with Set-Inclusive Constraints and Applications to Inexact Linear Programming, Operations Research 21(5), 1154–1157, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.21.5.1154
  • G. B. Dantzig, Linear Programming and Extensions, Princeton University Press, 1963. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400884179
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Robust Convex Optimization, Mathematics of Operations Research 23(4), 769–805, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.4.769
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Robust solutions of Linear Programming problems contaminated with uncertain data, Mathematical Programming 88, 411–424, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1007/PL00011380
  • D. Bertsimas and M. Sim, The Price of Robustness, Operations Research 52(1), 35–53, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1030.0065
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Régularisation d'inéquations variationnelles par approximations successives I: Every Weak Cluster Point of the Regularized Iterates Solves the Monotone Variational InequalityResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point algorithm is a basic iterative scheme of convex optimization and monotone operator theory. To solve a problem governed by a monotone operator, it replaces the problem by a sequence of better-conditioned problems, each regularized by a quadratic term centred at the previous iterate. Augmented Lagrangian methods, the Douglas–Rachford and ADMM splitting schemes, and many bundle methods can all be read as instances of it.

The scheme first appeared in a five-page note by Bernard Martinet in the Revue française d'informatique et de recherche opérationnelle (1970), under the name régularisation par approximations successives. Martinet stated it for a monotone variational inequality on a bounded closed convex subset of a Hilbert space and proved that the weak cluster points of the iterates are solutions. This mission formalizes that first convergence theorem as it was originally stated.

Timeline.

  • 1966–1967: Hartman–Stampacchia and Lions–Stampacchia prove existence of solutions for monotone, hemicontinuous variational inequalities on bounded closed convex sets (Lions–Stampacchia 1967). Minty's lemma characterizes the solution set by the inequality with the operator evaluated at the variable point.
  • 1970: Martinet introduces the regularization iteration (2) and proves Théorème 1 below (Martinet 1970). In §IV of the same note he states the convex-minimization version.
  • 1976: Rockafellar extends the method to maximal monotone operators, allowing inexact steps and variable step sizes, and proves weak convergence of the whole sequence when a zero exists (Rockafellar 1976).
  • 1991: Güler constructs an example in which the iterates converge weakly but not strongly (Güler 1991).

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let H′H'H′ be its dual, and write (φ,y)(\varphi, y)(φ,y) for the value of a functional φ∈H′\varphi\in H'φ∈H′ at y∈Hy\in Hy∈H. Let C⊆HC\subseteq HC⊆H be convex, closed and bounded, and let T:H→H′T:H\to H'T:H→H′ be

  • monotone on CCC: (Tx−Ty, x−y)≥0(Tx-Ty,\,x-y)\ge0(Tx−Ty,x−y)≥0 for all x,y∈Cx,y\in Cx,y∈C;
  • hemicontinuous on CCC: for all x,y∈Cx,y\in Cx,y∈C, the map t↦T((1−t)x+ty)t\mapsto T((1-t)x+ty)t↦T((1−t)x+ty), t∈[0,1]t\in[0,1]t∈[0,1], is continuous into H′H'H′ with its weak topology.

The variational inequality (1) asks for xˉ∈C\bar x\in Cxˉ∈C such that

(Txˉ, x−xˉ)≥0∀x∈C.(T\bar x,\, x-\bar x)\ge 0\qquad\forall x\in C .(Txˉ,x−xˉ)≥0∀x∈C.

Its solution set is denoted MMM (solSet T C in Lean).

Martinet's regularization algorithm starts from x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C. Given xn∈Cx^n\in Cxn∈C, it determines xn+1∈Cx^{n+1}\in Cxn+1∈C such that

(Txn+1, x−xn+1)+⟨xn+1−xn, x−xn+1⟩≥0∀x∈C.(2)(Tx^{n+1},\, x-x^{n+1})+\langle x^{n+1}-x^n,\, x-x^{n+1}\rangle\ge 0\qquad\forall x\in C. \tag{2}(Txn+1,x−xn+1)+⟨xn+1−xn,x−xn+1⟩≥0∀x∈C.(2)

In words, xn+1x^{n+1}xn+1 solves the variational inequality for the operator T+( ⋅ −xn)T+(\,\cdot\,-x^n)T+(⋅−xn), which is strongly monotone. A point x~\tilde xx~ is a weak cluster point of (xn)(x^n)(xn) if every neighbourhood of x~\tilde xx~ in the weak topology contains xnx^nxn for infinitely many nnn.

Formalization targets

Goal: Théorème 1

x~ a weak cluster point of (xn) ⟹ x~∈M.\tilde x \text{ a weak cluster point of } (x^n)\ \Longrightarrow\ \tilde x\in M .x~ a weak cluster point of (xn) ⟹ x~∈M.

Every weak cluster point of the regularized iterates solves (1). The paper's Lemme 2 states the same thing. The goal assumes neither that (1) has a solution nor that TTT is bounded on CCC.

Milestones, in the order the paper uses them

  1. §2.1: (1) has at least one solution when C≠∅C\neq\emptysetC=∅, so M≠∅M\neq\emptysetM=∅.
  2. §2.2: the step (2) has exactly one solution xn+1∈Cx^{n+1}\in Cxn+1∈C for every xn∈Cx^n\in Cxn∈C.
  3. §2.3, (5): Minty's characterization M={xˉ∈C∣(Tx, x−xˉ)≥0 ∀x∈C}M=\{\bar x\in C\mid (Tx,\,x-\bar x)\ge0\ \forall x\in C\}M={xˉ∈C∣(Tx,x−xˉ)≥0 ∀x∈C}.
  4. §2.3, (7): for every xˉ∈M\bar x\in Mxˉ∈M, ∥xn+1−xˉ∥2≤∥xn−xˉ∥2−∥xn+1−xn∥2\|x^{n+1}-\bar x\|^2\le\|x^n-\bar x\|^2-\|x^{n+1}-x^n\|^2∥xn+1−xˉ∥2≤∥xn−xˉ∥2−∥xn+1−xn∥2.
  5. Lemme 1: ∥xn+1−xn∥→0\|x^{n+1}-x^n\|\to0∥xn+1−xn∥→0.
  6. §2.3, (8): lim inf⁡n(Txn+1, x−xn+1)≥0\liminf_n (Tx^{n+1},\,x-x^{n+1})\ge0liminfn​(Txn+1,x−xn+1)≥0 for every x∈Cx\in Cx∈C.
  7. §2.3, (9): lim inf⁡n(Tx, x−xn)≥0\liminf_n (Tx,\,x-x^{n})\ge0liminfn​(Tx,x−xn)≥0 for every x∈Cx\in Cx∈C.
  8. Corollaire (stronger than the goal): if M={xˉ}M=\{\bar x\}M={xˉ}, then xn⇀xˉx^n\rightharpoonup\bar xxn⇀xˉ.

Significance

The result. Théorème 1 is the first convergence theorem for the proximal point method. The method only needs to solve strongly monotone subproblems, and those are well posed even when the original problem is not. Together with the existence result, the theorem says the iterates accumulate weakly only at solutions. When the solution is unique, the whole sequence converges weakly (the Corollaire). The later theory of Rockafellar, Brézis–Lions and the splitting literature refines this statement.

Formalizing it. The result has been proved since 1970. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version that follows the original hypotheses: an operator into the dual, hemicontinuity rather than continuity, and no maximality assumption. The cited ingredients, the Lions–Stampacchia existence theorem in an infinite-dimensional Hilbert space and Minty's lemma, are not in Mathlib as far as this mission is aware. Formalizing them is part of the work and is reusable well beyond this paper. The milestone items on the platform are statements awaiting proof. None of them has a machine-checked proof yet.

Difficulty

Lemme 1 and inequality (7) follow from the defining inequality (2) and the algebra of the inner product. The difficulty is at two other points.

First, the iterates satisfy the variational inequality only approximately, and only with TTT evaluated at the iterate. A weak cluster point gives no control over TxnTx^{n}Txn, because TTT is merely hemicontinuous and is not assumed weakly continuous or bounded. The obvious idea, to pass to the limit in (Txn+1, x−xn+1)≥−εn(Tx^{n+1},\,x-x^{n+1})\ge -\varepsilon_n(Txn+1,x−xn+1)≥−εn​, fails for this reason. Passing to the limit requires the reformulation in which TTT is evaluated at a fixed point of CCC. That reformulation is Minty's characterization (5), and proving it uses hemicontinuity along segments.

Second, the proof of Lemme 1 needs a solution of (1) to exist. In infinite dimensions that is the Lions–Stampacchia theorem. Its standard proof goes through Brouwer's fixed point theorem on finite-dimensional sections together with weak compactness of CCC, and this is the heaviest item of the mission.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is a real Hilbert space: NormedAddCommGroup H, InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H. The paper says only "espace de Hilbert". Its ordered inequalities force real scalars.
  • H′H'H′ is StrongDual ℝ H, and (φ,y)(\varphi,y)(φ,y) is φ y. TTT is not replaced by a map H→HH\to HH→H through the Riesz isomorphism.
  • Hemicontinuity is weak-* continuity: for x,y∈Cx,y\in Cx,y∈C and every z∈Hz\in Hz∈H, the map t↦(T((1−t)x+ty),z)t\mapsto (T((1-t)x+ty),z)t↦(T((1−t)x+ty),z) is continuous on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Since HHH is reflexive, this is the paper's weak topology on H′H'H′. It is not strengthened to continuity of TTT.
  • The algorithm is a relation (IsRegSeq): any sequence with x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C that satisfies (2) at every step. Existence and uniqueness of the step are milestone 2, not built into a definition.
  • A weak cluster point is MapClusterPt in WeakSpace ℝ H, a cluster point in the weak topology. It is not a cluster point in the norm topology, which would make the goal weaker.
  • lim inf⁡nan≥0\liminf_n a_n\ge0liminfn​an​≥0 in (8) and (9) is stated as ∀ε>0\forall\varepsilon>0∀ε>0, eventually an≥−εa_n\ge-\varepsilonan​≥−ε. Filter.liminf on R\mathbb RR returns a junk value on sequences that are unbounded below.
  • "C nonempty" is added to the existence milestone. The paper leaves it implicit, and the claim is false for C=∅C=\emptysetC=∅.
  • In Lean the sequence is called xxx and an arbitrary point of CCC is called yyy. The paper uses the letter xxx for both.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out. The goal does not assume M≠∅M\neq\emptysetM=∅, boundedness of TTT, or strong cluster points. Its hypotheses are satisfiable: H=RH=\mathbb RH=R, C=[−1,1]C=[-1,1]C=[−1,1], (Tx,y)=xy(Tx,y)=xy(Tx,y)=xy, xn=2−nx^n=2^{-n}xn=2−n is an instance, checked locally.

Not formalized: Remarques 1 and 2 of §II (a variable-weight variant of (2), whose printed form is apparently misprinted, and the removal of boundedness of CCC under a coercivity condition), because the paper gives neither a proof. Théorème 2 (§III) and the convex-minimization §IV are not formalized either. §IV is the subject of the companion mission.

Contributions are welcome on each milestone, and especially on the general infrastructure: Minty's lemma, Hartman–Stampacchia/Lions–Stampacchia existence for monotone hemicontinuous operators, and the fact that bounded sequences in a Hilbert space have weak cluster points. A proved Brouwer fixed point theorem (AGT.brouwer_fixed_point) and a Banach–Alaoglu theorem (FamousTheorems.banach_alaoglu) are available on the platform as tools.

Selected references

  • B. Martinet, Brève communication. Régularisation d'inéquations variationnelles par approximations successives, Revue française d'informatique et de recherche opérationnelle, série rouge, 4(R-3) (1970), 154–158. https://doi.org/10.1051/m2an/197004R301541
  • J.-L. Lions, G. Stampacchia, Variational inequalities, Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics 20 (1967), 493–519. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160200302
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 14 (1976), 877–898. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • O. Güler, On the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for convex minimization, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 29 (1991), 403–419. https://doi.org/10.1137/0329022
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations III: Reduced-Form Criterion — a Linear Generalized Equation over a Polyhedral Set Is Strongly Regular Iff Its Reduced Form Is Uniquely Solvable on LResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization and equilibrium modelling, among them linear and nonlinear complementarity problems, variational inequalities over polyhedra, and the Karush–Kuhn–Tucker conditions of nonlinear programs, can be written as a single generalized equation

0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x),0\in f(x)+\partial\psi_C(x),0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x),

where ∂ψC\partial\psi_C∂ψC​ is the normal-cone operator of a closed convex set CCC. S. M. Robinson introduced strong regularity of such an inclusion at a solution x0x_0x0​ in Strongly regular generalized equations (1980) and proved an implicit-function theorem for it: when the linearised inclusion has a locally unique, Lipschitz inverse, solutions of the perturbed problem exist, are locally unique and depend Lipschitz-continuously on the perturbation. Strong regularity has since become the standard stability notion behind sensitivity analysis and the local convergence of Newton-type methods for variational problems; see Dontchev and Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings (Springer, 2nd ed. 2014, doi:10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3).

Strong regularity depends only on the linearisation, so deciding it means deciding it for a linear generalized equation. For a general polyhedral set CCC the paper's appendix does this by a reduction: locally around x0x_0x0​ the problem is equivalent to a homogeneous problem on a cone, the reduced form, and strong regularity is equivalent to unique solvability of that reduced form. This mission formalizes that appendix and the criterion it yields.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the standard inner product, which identifies Rn\mathbb R^nRn with its dual. For C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn the normal cone at xxx is

∂ψC(x)={y:⟨y,c−x⟩≤0 for all c∈C} if x∈C,∂ψC(x)=∅ if x∉C.\partial\psi_C(x)=\{y:\langle y,c-x\rangle\le 0\ \text{for all } c\in C\}\ \text{if } x\in C,\qquad \partial\psi_C(x)=\emptyset\ \text{if } x\notin C.∂ψC​(x)={y:⟨y,c−x⟩≤0 for all c∈C} if x∈C,∂ψC​(x)=∅ if x∈/C.

A set is polyhedral convex if it is the intersection of finitely many closed half-spaces. Fix a nonempty polyhedral convex CCC, an n×nn\times nn×n real matrix AAA and a∈Rna\in\mathbb R^na∈Rn, and consider

0∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x).(A.1)0\in Ax+a+\partial\psi_C(x).\qquad\text{(A.1)}0∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x).(A.1)

It is strongly regular at a solution x0x_0x0​ with constant λ\lambdaλ if there are neighbourhoods UUU of 000 and VVV of x0x_0x0​ such that for each y∈Uy\in Uy∈U the perturbed inclusion

y∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x)(A.2)y\in Ax+a+\partial\psi_C(x)\qquad\text{(A.2)}y∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x)(A.2)

has exactly one solution x=s(y)x=s(y)x=s(y) in VVV, and ∥s(y1)−s(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥\|s(y_1)-s(y_2)\|\le\lambda\|y_1-y_2\|∥s(y1​)−s(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ on UUU.

The reduction uses the following objects, all built from the data:

  • y0:=Ax0+ay_0:=Ax_0+ay0​:=Ax0​+a;
  • the face F:=∂ψC∗(−y0)F:=\partial\psi_C^*(-y_0)F:=∂ψC∗​(−y0​), the set of maximisers of ⟨−y0,⋅⟩\langle -y_0,\cdot\rangle⟨−y0​,⋅⟩ over CCC (it contains x0x_0x0​);
  • the tangent cone T:=TF(x0)=∂ψF(x0)∘T:=T_F(x_0)=\partial\psi_F(x_0)^\circT:=TF​(x0​)=∂ψF​(x0​)∘, the polar of the normal cone of FFF at x0x_0x0​;
  • the subspace LLL parallel to FFF (the direction of its affine hull) and the orthogonal projector PLP_LPL​;
  • the lineality space MMM of TTT, the subspace L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥, and the cone K:=T∩M⊥K:=T\cap M^\perpK:=T∩M⊥.

The reduced form of (A.1) at x0x_0x0​ is the inclusion z∈PLAw+∂ψT(w)z\in P_LAw+\partial\psi_T(w)z∈PL​Aw+∂ψT​(w) for z∈Lz\in Lz∈L; in an orthonormal basis adapted to MMM, L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥ and L⊥L^\perpL⊥ it is z∈Bw+∂ψRr×K(w)z\in Bw+\partial\psi_{\mathbb R^r\times K}(w)z∈Bw+∂ψRr×K​(w) with an (r+s)×(r+s)(r+s)\times(r+s)(r+s)×(r+s) matrix BBB. It is vacuous when L={0}L=\{0\}L={0}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem A.4 (p. 60)

If x0x_0x0​ solves (A.1), then (A.1) is strongly regular at x0x_0x0​ if and only if

L={0}or∀z∈L ∃! w∈Rn: z∈PLAw+∂ψT(w).L=\{0\}\quad\text{or}\quad\forall z\in L\ \exists!\,w\in\mathbb R^n:\ z\in P_LAw+\partial\psi_T(w).L={0}or∀z∈L ∃!w∈Rn: z∈PL​Aw+∂ψT​(w).

No Lipschitz constant is fixed: the left side is "strongly regular for some λ\lambdaλ".

Milestones

  1. Proposition A.1 (p. 58): for x0∈Cx_0\in Cx0​∈C, (C−x0)∩U=TC(x0)∩U(C-x_0)\cap U=T_C(x_0)\cap U(C−x0​)∩U=TC​(x0​)∩U for some neighbourhood UUU of 000.
  2. Proposition A.2 (p. 58): on F=∂ψC∗(−y0)F=\partial\psi_C^*(-y_0)F=∂ψC∗​(−y0​), ∂ψF(x)=∂ψC(x)+y0R+\partial\psi_F(x)=\partial\psi_C(x)+y_0\mathbb R_+∂ψF​(x)=∂ψC​(x)+y0​R+​, and ∂ψC∗(−y)⊂F\partial\psi_C^*(-y)\subset F∂ψC∗​(−y)⊂F for yyy near y0y_0y0​.
  3. Proposition A.3 (p. 58): for x0∈Fx_0\in Fx0​∈F, near the origin, 0∈(y0+k)+∂ψC(x0+h)0\in(y_0+k)+\partial\psi_C(x_0+h)0∈(y0​+k)+∂ψC​(x0​+h) iff 0∈PLk+∂ψT(h)0\in P_Lk+\partial\psi_T(h)0∈PL​k+∂ψT​(h).
  4. The correspondence (A.4) (p. 60): for xxx near x0x_0x0​ and small yyy, (A.2) holds iff 0∈PL(Ah−y)+∂ψT(h)0\in P_L(Ah-y)+\partial\psi_T(h)0∈PL​(Ah−y)+∂ψT​(h) with h=x−x0h=x-x_0h=x−x0​.

Companions

  • Corollary 3.2 (p. 53), in two items. Sufficiency: the reduced form is vacuous, or B11B_{11}B11​ is nonsingular and the Schur complement B/B11B/B_{11}B/B11​ is positive definite. Characterisation when K=R+sK=\mathbb R^s_+K=R+s​: strongly regular iff vacuous, or B11B_{11}B11​ nonsingular and B/B11B/B_{11}B/B11​ a P-matrix.
  • The 3 × 3 linear complementarity example of §4 (p. 53): strongly regular at x0=(1,0,0)x_0=(1,0,0)x0​=(1,0,0), and not strongly regular once the entry 555 of AAA becomes 444.

Significance

Theorem A.4 turns a local stability property, defined through neighbourhoods and an inverse map, into a finite-dimensional algebraic question about one homogeneous problem on a polyhedral cone. Combined with the Schur-complement criterion of Theorem 3.1, it gives checkable conditions (Corollary 3.2): nonsingularity of a block and positive definiteness, or the P-matrix property, of its Schur complement. Through the KKT reformulation of §4 this is the route by which strong second-order sufficiency and linear independence of binding constraint gradients imply strong regularity in nonlinear programming. The example of p. 53 shows the criterion deciding cases where AAA itself is neither positive definite nor a P-matrix.

The results are classical and proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. The formalization adds a coordinate-free statement of the reduced form, which the paper writes only in an adapted basis; a Lean account of exposed faces and tangent cones of polyhedra, with their local conic structure (Propositions A.1–A.2), which the paper lists "without proof" and cites to Rockafellar; and checked versions of the corollary and the example.

Difficulty

The definition of strong regularity is local, while condition (ii) is global on LLL. The obvious argument, "linearise and read off the inverse", does not apply, because ∂ψC\partial\psi_C∂ψC​ is a set-valued map whose graph changes shape from point to point. The step that carries the weight is Proposition A.3: a perturbation of y0y_0y0​ may move the solution off the face FFF, and only polyhedrality, through the finitely many values of ∂ψC\partial\psi_C∂ψC​ on FFF and the local conic structure of A.1–A.2, rules this out uniformly in a neighbourhood. The direction from strong regularity to (ii) needs positive homogeneity of the reduced form to pass from uniqueness near 000 to uniqueness on all of LLL. The direction from (ii) to strong regularity needs the Lipschitz property of a single-valued inverse of a polyhedral multifunction (Robinson 1979, cited as [12, Proposition 2]), which is not elementary.

Formalization scope

  • The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with inclusions written as memberships: (A.2) is y−(Ax+a)∈∂ψC(x)y-(Ax+a)\in\partial\psi_C(x)y−(Ax+a)∈∂ψC​(x). A matrix acts through Matrix.toEuclideanLin. The normal cone carries the clause x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, so ∂ψC(x)=∅\partial\psi_C(x)=\emptyset∂ψC​(x)=∅ off CCC; without it every inclusion would be satisfiable at points outside CCC and the statements would change meaning.
  • TC(x0)T_C(x_0)TC​(x0​) is the polar of the normal cone, as on p. 58, not the closure of the cone of feasible directions. FFF is the set of maximisers of ⟨−y0,⋅⟩\langle -y_0,\cdot\rangle⟨−y0​,⋅⟩ (the sign matters: the opposite face would make the theorem false). LLL is the direction of the affine span of FFF, and PLP_LPL​ is Mathlib's Submodule.starProjection.
  • The reduced form is stated basis-free on LLL; ∂ψT\partial\psi_T∂ψT​ is the normal cone of TTT in all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. In Corollary 3.2, B11B_{11}B11​ and B/B11B/B_{11}B/B11​ are expressed through projectors onto MMM and L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥. Only the case K=R+sK=\mathbb R^s_+K=R+s​ is stated in a basis, an orthonormal basis of L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥ in which KKK is the orthant.
  • "Positive definite" does not require symmetry. "Strongly regular" without a constant is existential in λ\lambdaλ, with λ\lambdaλ real.
  • Corollary 3.2's second sentence refers on the page to "(3.8)", an evident slip for (3.9); it is formalized for (3.9).
  • The standing assumption "C nonempty polyhedral convex" is a hypothesis of every item.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: strong regularity requires existence, uniqueness in VVV and the Lipschitz bound together, and condition (ii) requires existence and uniqueness for every z∈Lz\in Lz∈L.
  • Needed infrastructure: faces and tangent cones of polyhedra and their local structure (Minkowski–Weyl, finitely many faces), orthogonal decompositions, and Lipschitz continuity of single-valued polyhedral inverses. All of this is reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the propositions, of the correspondence, and of the companions are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly regular generalized equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 43–62, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • S. M. Robinson, Generalized equations and their solutions, Part I: Basic theory, Mathematical Programming Study 10, 128–141, 1979. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0120850
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • A. L. Dontchev and R. T. Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, 2nd ed., Springer, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3
  • R. W. Cottle, Manifestations of the Schur complement, Linear Algebra and its Applications 8, 189–211, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1016/0024-3795(74)90066-4
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Ellipsoid Method and Its Consequences in Combinatorial Optimization: With a Weak Separation Oracle, the Rounded Ellipsoid Method Is ε-Optimal After N = 4n²⌈log(2R²‖c‖/(rε))⌉ StepsResearch Paper

Motivation

The ellipsoid method decides questions about a convex set K⊆RnK \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nK⊆Rn by maintaining an ellipsoid that contains the relevant part of KKK and shrinking it step by step. Introduced for convex minimization by Yudin and Nemirovskii and by Shor in the 1970s, it became famous in 1979 when Khachiyan used it to show that linear programming is solvable in polynomial time. Grötschel, Lovász and Schrijver (Combinatorica 1 (1981)) observed that the method never needs an explicit description of KKK: it only needs, for a query point yyy, either a confirmation that yyy is (nearly) in KKK or a hyperplane (nearly) separating yyy from KKK. From this they derived that optimization and separation are polynomially equivalent for convex bodies, which in turn gives polynomial algorithms for problems with exponentially many constraints: matroid intersection, submodular function minimization, and the stable set problem in perfect graphs.

The engine of all of these applications is a single quantitative statement, Theorem (2.4) of the paper: with a weak separation oracle and with all numbers rounded to a fixed number of binary digits, a prescribed number NNN of ellipsoid steps produces an ε\varepsilonε-optimal point.

Timeline. 1976–1977: Yudin–Nemirovskii and Shor, the method for convex programming. 1979: Khachiyan, polynomial-time linear programming. 1981: Gács–Lovász publish a complete proof of Khachiyan's result with the explicit rounded update; Grötschel–Lovász–Schrijver state and prove the weak-oracle version, Theorem (2.4), and its combinatorial consequences; Bland–Goldfarb–Todd survey the method (Oper. Res. 29 (1981)). 1988: the monograph of Grötschel, Lovász and Schrijver (Springer) gives the full theory of weak oracles.

Setting

All norms are Euclidean: ∥v∥=vTv\|v\| = \sqrt{v^{\mathsf T}v}∥v∥=vTv​, and for a symmetric matrix ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥ is the largest absolute eigenvalue. S(a0,ρ)S(a_0,\rho)S(a0​,ρ) is the closed Euclidean ball of radius ρ\rhoρ about a0a_0a0​, and S(K,δ)S(K,\delta)S(K,δ) the set of points within distance δ\deltaδ of KKK.

A convex body (K,a0,r,R)(K, a_0, r, R)(K,a0​,r,R) consists of a compact convex K⊆RnK\subseteq\mathbb{R}^nK⊆Rn, n≥2n\ge 2n≥2, and 0<r≤R0<r\le R0<r≤R with

S(a0,r)⊆K⊆S(a0,R).S(a_0,r)\subseteq K\subseteq S(a_0,R).S(a0​,r)⊆K⊆S(a0​,R).

A weak separation oracle with precision δ>0\delta>0δ>0 answers a query yyy either with "y∈S(K,δ)y\in S(K,\delta)y∈S(K,δ)", or with a vector ddd, ∥d∥≥1\|d\|\ge 1∥d∥≥1, such that dTx≤dTy+δd^{\mathsf T}x\le d^{\mathsf T}y+\deltadTx≤dTy+δ for all x∈Kx\in Kx∈K.

Given an objective ccc and an accuracy ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 (with ε<r\varepsilon<rε<r and ∥c∥≥1\|c\|\ge 1∥c∥≥1), set

N=4n2⌈log⁡2R2∥c∥rε⌉,δ=R2 4−N300n,p=5N.N = 4n^2\left\lceil \log\frac{2R^2\|c\|}{r\varepsilon}\right\rceil,\qquad \delta = \frac{R^2\,4^{-N}}{300n},\qquad p = 5N .N=4n2⌈logrε2R2∥c∥​⌉,δ=300nR24−N​,p=5N.

Start from x0=a0x_0=a_0x0​=a0​, A0=R2IA_0=R^2IA0​=R2I. At step kkk query the oracle at xkx_kxk​. If it answers "feasible", kkk is a feasible index and a=ca=ca=c; otherwise a=−da=-da=−d. Put bk=Aka/aTAkab_k = A_ka/\sqrt{a^{\mathsf T}A_ka}bk​=Ak​a/aTAk​a​ and

xk∗=xk+1n+1bk,Ak∗=2n2+32n2(Ak−2n+1bkbkT),x_k^* = x_k+\frac{1}{n+1}b_k,\qquad A_k^* = \frac{2n^2+3}{2n^2}\Bigl(A_k-\frac{2}{n+1}b_kb_k^{\mathsf T}\Bigr),xk∗​=xk​+n+11​bk​,Ak∗​=2n22n2+3​(Ak​−n+12​bk​bkT​),

and obtain xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​, Ak+1A_{k+1}Ak+1​ by rounding xk∗x_k^*xk∗​, Ak∗A_k^*Ak∗​ to ppp binary digits, keeping Ak+1A_{k+1}Ak+1​ symmetric. The ellipsoids are Ek={x:(x−xk)TAk−1(x−xk)≤1}E_k=\{x : (x-x_k)^{\mathsf T}A_k^{-1}(x-x_k)\le 1\}Ek​={x:(x−xk​)TAk−1​(x−xk​)≤1}, and KkK_kKk​ is the set of points of KKK whose objective value is at least that of every feasible centre found before step kkk.

In Lean, IsRoundedRun K c a₀ R δ p N x A feas a d records exactly these conditions, Kk is KkK_kKk​, and EkE_kEk​ is the published LinearOptimization.ellipsoid (x k) (A k).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem (2.4)

If j<Nj<Nj<N is a feasible index whose centre is best among the feasible centres, cTxj=max⁡{cTxk:k<N feasible}c^{\mathsf T}x_j=\max\{c^{\mathsf T}x_k : k<N \text{ feasible}\}cTxj​=max{cTxk​:k<N feasible}, then

cTxj ≥ max⁡x∈KcTx−ε.c^{\mathsf T}x_j \ \ge\ \max_{x\in K} c^{\mathsf T}x - \varepsilon .cTxj​ ≥ x∈Kmax​cTx−ε.

The statement is for every run, i.e. for every sequence of valid oracle answers and every admissible rounding.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. (13): the explicit inverse (Ak∗)−1=2n22n2+3(Ak−1+2n−1aaTaTAka)(A_k^*)^{-1}=\frac{2n^2}{2n^2+3}\bigl(A_k^{-1}+\frac{2}{n-1}\frac{aa^{\mathsf T}}{a^{\mathsf T}A_ka}\bigr)(Ak∗​)−1=2n2+32n2​(Ak−1​+n−12​aTAk​aaaT​), and Ak∗≻0A_k^*\succ 0Ak∗​≻0.
  2. Lemma (2.1): A0,…,ANA_0,\dots,A_NA0​,…,AN​ are positive definite, ∥xk∥≤∥a0∥+R2k\|x_k\|\le\|a_0\|+R2^k∥xk​∥≤∥a0​∥+R2k, ∥Ak∥≤R22k\|A_k\|\le R^22^k∥Ak​∥≤R22k, ∥Ak−1∥≤R−24k\|A_k^{-1}\|\le R^{-2}4^k∥Ak−1​∥≤R−24k.
  3. Lemma (2.2): μ(Ek+1)<e−1/(5n)μ(Ek)\mu(E_{k+1}) < e^{-1/(5n)}\mu(E_k)μ(Ek+1​)<e−1/(5n)μ(Ek​).
  4. Lemma (2.3): Kk⊆EkK_k\subseteq E_kKk​⊆Ek​ for k=0,…,Nk=0,\dots,Nk=0,…,N.
  5. (32): μ(KN)≤μ(EN)≤e−N/(4n)μ(E0)=e−N/(4n)RnVn\mu(K_N)\le\mu(E_N)\le e^{-N/(4n)}\mu(E_0)=e^{-N/(4n)}R^nV_nμ(KN​)≤μ(EN​)≤e−N/(4n)μ(E0​)=e−N/(4n)RnVn​.
  6. (34): the piece above the level ttt of the cone with base the rrr-disc through x0x_0x0​ orthogonal to ccc and apex y∈Ky\in Ky∈K has volume Vn−1rn−1(ζ−cTx0)n∥c∥(ζ−tζ−cTx0)n\frac{V_{n-1}r^{n-1}(\zeta-c^{\mathsf T}x_0)}{n\|c\|}\bigl(\frac{\zeta-t}{\zeta-c^{\mathsf T}x_0}\bigr)^nn∥c∥Vn−1​rn−1(ζ−cTx0​)​(ζ−cTx0​ζ−t​)n, which bounds μ({z∈K:cTz≥t})\mu(\{z\in K: c^{\mathsf T}z\ge t\})μ({z∈K:cTz≥t}) from below.

Significance

Theorem (2.4) turns any weak separation procedure for a convex body into a weak optimization procedure, with a number of oracle calls and a numerical precision polynomial in nnn, log⁡R\log RlogR, log⁡(1/r)\log(1/r)log(1/r), log⁡∥c∥\log\|c\|log∥c∥ and log⁡(1/ε)\log(1/\varepsilon)log(1/ε). This is the "only if" half of the paper's Theorem (3.1), and through it the source of the polynomial algorithms of Chapters 4–6 of the paper and of the 1988 monograph. Its rounding analysis is what makes the method an algorithm on finite-precision numbers rather than an argument about exact real arithmetic.

The result is proved, and has been for over forty years. What this mission adds is a machine-checked proof of the rounded, weak-oracle version, including the error analysis that the paper compresses into "rounding errors can be estimated similarly". Related items already on the platform formalize exact-arithmetic ellipsoid methods: Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis's central-cut method for polyhedra (LinearOptimization.ellipsoid_method_correct, proved) and Bubeck's version for convex minimization with a first-order oracle (arXiv:1405.4980). Neither has a weak oracle, the inflated factor (2n2+3)/(2n2)(2n^2+3)/(2n^2)(2n2+3)/(2n2), or rounding.

Difficulty

For the exact update with factor n2/(n2−1)n^2/(n^2-1)n2/(n2−1) and an exact separating hyperplane through the centre, containment and volume decrease are a classical computation. Here three perturbations interact. The cut is shifted by δ\deltaδ, so the retained half-ellipsoid is slightly larger than a half. The rounded matrix differs from Ak∗A_k^*Ak∗​ by up to n2−pn2^{-p}n2−p in norm, which could destroy positive definiteness if the smallest eigenvalue were not controlled from below, and Lemma (2.1)'s bound R24−kR^24^{-k}R24−k is what controls it. The containment Kk+1⊆Ek+1K_{k+1}\subseteq E_{k+1}Kk+1​⊆Ek+1​ must absorb both errors, and it is the inflation factor (2n2+3)/(2n2)(2n^2+3)/(2n^2)(2n2+3)/(2n2), chosen larger than the optimal one, that leaves room. The paper bounds the remainder term in (29) only by "similar methods"; making that bound explicit is the bulk of the work. The final step also needs the volume rate e−N/(4n)e^{-N/(4n)}e−N/(4n) in (32), which is sharper than iterating Lemma (2.2) and requires the exact per-step volume ratio of the inflated update.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is Fin n → ℝ with Lebesgue measure. Since Lean's norm on Fin n → ℝ is the sup norm, the Euclidean norm is written out (euclNorm), and the bounds ∥Ak∥≤R22k\|A_k\|\le R^22^k∥Ak​∥≤R22k, ∥Ak−1∥≤R−24k\|A_k^{-1}\|\le R^{-2}4^k∥Ak−1​∥≤R−24k are stated as quadratic-form (eigenvalue) bounds. NNN uses the natural logarithm and the integer ceiling.

The runs generalize the page in three ways, each of which makes the theorems stronger: the oracle's answers are any answers valid for its specification; rounding is any symmetric value within 2−p2^{-p}2−p entrywise; and data are real rather than rational.

The page's standing assumptions ε<r\varepsilon<rε<r, ∥c∥≥1\|c\|\ge1∥c∥≥1, n≥2n\ge2n≥2 (p. 173) are hypotheses. Two hypotheses are added, because the page's NNN, δ\deltaδ and ppp are absolute numbers and the claims fail at extreme scales:

  • R≥1R\ge 1R≥1 (Lemmas (2.1)–(2.3), (32), Theorem (2.4)): for R=r=2−1000R=r=2^{-1000}R=r=2−1000, ε=r/2\varepsilon=r/2ε=r/2, n=2n=2n=2, rounding can make A1=0A_1=0A1​=0.
  • ε≤1\varepsilon\le1ε≤1 (Lemma (2.3), (32), Theorem (2.4)): for R=r=1013R=r=10^{13}R=r=1013, ε=0.99r\varepsilon=0.99rε=0.99r, n=2n=2n=2, δ>2r\delta>2rδ>2r, and a valid oracle can cut away all of KKK.

Neither is needed in (13) or (34).

A run predicate without the oracle clause would make Lemma (2.3) false, and one with exact equality instead of rounding would state a weaker theorem; the goal quantifies over every run, never over some run. Positive definiteness of the AkA_kAk​ is a consequence (Lemma (2.1)), not a hypothesis: since Lean's inverse of a singular matrix is 000, assuming it would hide the lemma's content.

Out of scope: the paper's polynomial-time claims (Theorem (3.1) and its consequences), the bit length of the numbers, and the rationality of inputs, since no oracle-machine model with bit complexity exists in Mathlib or on the platform.

Reusable infrastructure: volumes of ellipsoids and of cone pieces, Sherman–Morrison-type inverses, and perturbation bounds for positive definite matrices. Contributions of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Grötschel, L. Lovász, A. Schrijver, The ellipsoid method and its consequences in combinatorial optimization, Combinatorica 1(2) (1981) 169–197. https://doi.org/10.1007/bf02579273
  • P. Gács, L. Lovász, Khachiyan's algorithm for linear programming, Mathematical Programming Study 14 (1981) 61–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0120921
  • L. G. Khachiyan, A polynomial algorithm in linear programming, Soviet Mathematics Doklady 20 (1979) 191–194 (English translation of the original article).
  • R. G. Bland, D. Goldfarb, M. J. Todd, The ellipsoid method: a survey, Operations Research 29(6) (1981) 1039–1091. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.29.6.1039
  • M. Grötschel, L. Lovász, A. Schrijver, Geometric Algorithms and Combinatorial Optimization, Springer, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-97881-4
  • D. Bertsimas, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization, Athena Scientific, 1997, Ch. 8. Book record.
  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8 (2015). https://arxiv.org/abs/1405.4980
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 1: The Bregman Proximal Point Algorithm Converges to a Zero of a Maximal Monotone OperatorResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point algorithm is a way to find a zero of a set-valued monotone operator by repeatedly solving a regularized version of that operator equation. Its classical regularizer is quadratic, so the distance from one iterate to the next is Euclidean. In convex optimization, that geometry can be poorly matched to the domain: the natural iterates may be constrained to a positive orthant, a simplex, or an open set with a meaningful boundary. Eckstein's 1993 paper studies what happens when a Bregman function supplies the regularization instead. The convergence question matters because the later multiplier methods in the same paper are instances of this general iteration. Eckstein (1993) develops the general result before applying it to convex programs.

The result considered here is Theorem 1 of that paper. It concerns an existing infinite run: it states what such a run does, while Theorems 4 and 5 address conditions under which a run can be generated. This separation keeps the convergence assertion precise. The result is known mathematically; the mission asks for a Lean proof of its stated generality, including its alternative when the operator has no zero.

Setting

Work in a finite-dimensional real inner-product space HHH, representing the paper's Rn\mathbb R^nRn. A monotone operator T:H→2HT:H\to 2^HT:H→2H associates a set T(x)T(x)T(x) of vectors with each point. It is monotone when ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0\langle x-y,u-v\rangle\ge0⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0 for every u∈T(x)u\in T(x)u∈T(x) and v∈T(y)v\in T(y)v∈T(y), and maximal monotone when its graph has no proper monotone extension. Its domain is dom⁡T={x:T(x)≠∅}\operatorname{dom}T=\{x:T(x)\ne\varnothing\}domT={x:T(x)=∅}; a zero is a point zzz with 0∈T(z)0\in T(z)0∈T(z).

Let S⊆HS\subseteq HS⊆H be open and hhh a real function on S‾\overline SS. At y∈Sy\in Sy∈S, define the Bregman distance

Dh(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,x∈S‾.D_h(x,y)=h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangle,\qquad x\in\overline S.Dh​(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,x∈S.

It need not be symmetric and is generally not a metric. Definition 1 requires hhh to be continuously differentiable on SSS, strictly convex and continuous on S‾\overline SS, and to satisfy boundedness of both kinds of partial DhD_hDh​ sublevel sets. Two sequential conditions connect convergence in HHH to convergence of Bregman distances, including sequences approaching the boundary of SSS. These six requirements together define a Bregman function with zone SSS.

A Bregman proximal-point run uses positive parameters ckc_kck​ and a sequence xk∈Sx^k\in Sxk∈S satisfying

∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1)ck∈T(xk+1),k=0,1,….\frac{\nabla h(x^k)-\nabla h(x^{k+1})}{c_k}\in T(x^{k+1}),\qquad k=0,1,\ldots.ck​∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1)​∈T(xk+1),k=0,1,….

This is the inclusion form (4) of the paper's recursion (3). It permits set-valued TTT and does not assert that a next iterate exists for arbitrary starting data. The model also uses the paper's standing domain condition dom⁡T⊆S‾\operatorname{dom}T\subseteq\overline SdomT⊆S.

Formalization targets

The main target is Theorem 1. Assume that the positive parameters have a common positive lower bound and that one of the following conditions holds: (C1) dom⁡T‾⊆S\overline{\operatorname{dom}T}\subseteq SdomT⊆S, or (C2) T=∂fT=\partial fT=∂f for a proper lower semicontinuous convex extended-valued function fff. Then

T−1(0)≠∅⟹xk⟶z for some z∈T−1(0),T−1(0)=∅ and (C1)⟹{xk:k≥0} is unbounded.\begin{aligned} T^{-1}(0)\ne\varnothing &\quad\Longrightarrow\quad x^k\longrightarrow z\text{ for some }z\in T^{-1}(0),\\ T^{-1}(0)=\varnothing\text{ and (C1)} &\quad\Longrightarrow\quad \{x^k:k\ge0\}\text{ is unbounded}. \end{aligned}T−1(0)=∅T−1(0)=∅ and (C1)​⟹xk⟶z for some z∈T−1(0),⟹{xk:k≥0} is unbounded.​

The second line retains the paper's extra (C1) requirement. The standing inclusion dom⁡T⊆S‾\operatorname{dom}T\subseteq\overline SdomT⊆S has a different direction and role. The milestone list follows Lemma 1 and the three labelled steps of Theorem 1's convergence proof: the resolvent inequality, boundedness of the run when a zero exists, identification of every limit point as a zero, and convergence of the full run. The no-zero alternative remains in the goal because restating that conjunct as a separate milestone would add no independent target.

Significance

Theorem 1 says that the nonlinear iteration cannot remain bounded without approaching a zero under (C1), and that when a zero exists the whole sequence converges under either (C1) or (C2). This is stronger than saying only that accumulation points solve the operator equation. It supplies a common convergence result for the paper's later proximal minimization and multiplier algorithms, where the operator is often a subdifferential and the geometry comes from a nonquadratic hhh. Eckstein (1993) gives those applications after the general theorem.

A formalization would add a reusable interface for Bregman functions with open zones, including their boundary behavior, and for proximal-point runs of set-valued maximal monotone operators. The published platform definitions of monotone operators and extended-valued convex analysis are reused. The new proof work is the Bregman resolvent estimate and the convergence alternative at Theorem 1's level of generality. No machine-checked proof of this specific theorem is claimed here.

Difficulty

The usual Euclidean proximal-point theorem does not apply directly after changing coordinates by y=∇h(x)y=\nabla h(x)y=∇h(x): the transformed operator need not remain monotone, as the paper observes after Theorem 1. A proof must account for the nonsymmetric DhD_hDh​, the possible boundary of SSS, and two distinct ways to identify a limit point as a zero. Under (C1), the point lies where the gradient is continuous; under (C2), the argument uses the subdifferential structure instead. The no-zero case has its own difficulty because boundedness would have to contradict maximal monotonicity without first assuming that a zero exists. The proof cites a closed-graph result for maximal monotone operators and a zero-existence fact for operators with bounded domain; those external facts are groundwork for solvers, not invented milestones.

Formalization scope

Lean uses a finite-dimensional real inner-product space rather than a coordinate-fixed Rn\mathbb R^nRn. The total function h:H→Rh:H\to\mathbb Rh:H→R is constrained only on S‾\overline SS; its gradient is evaluated only on the open zone SSS. The Bregman distance is used on S‾×S\overline S\times SS×S. Definition 1's condition (vi) explicitly places its first sequence in S‾\overline SS, the natural domain stated immediately after the definition. The run explicitly keeps every xkx^kxk in SSS and encodes recursion (3) using the equivalent inclusion (4). A positive lower bound on ckc_kck​ is expressed by one ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with ck≥εc_k\ge\varepsilonck​≥ε for every kkk.

The operator TTT is a published set-valued operator object, with its published notions of monotonicity, maximality, domain, and zeros. The proper and convex extended-valued function in (C2) uses the published epigraph and subgradient definitions, with EReal able to express +∞+\infty+∞. Subdifferentials are built from those definitions. A limit point means a limit along a strictly increasing subsequence, and unboundedness means that the full set of iterates is not bounded. The proof step on p. 207 prints T−1(0)⊆ST^{-1}(0)\subseteq ST−1(0)⊆S; the formal Step 1 uses the standing condition T−1(0)⊆S‾T^{-1}(0)\subseteq\overline ST−1(0)⊆S, which is sufficient for the Bregman distance and also covers (C2).

The run relation cannot be satisfied by an arbitrary constant sequence: its inclusion must hold at every step, and a zero-free operator under (C1) triggers the unbounded conclusion. Nor does the theorem replace convergence by existence of one convergent subsequence. Reusable contributions include properties of the Bregman resolvent and maximal-monotone graph limits. Theorem 5's separate existence and minimization claims are outside this mission's core.

Selected references

  • Jonathan Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 202–226, 1993. DOI: 10.1287/moor.18.1.202.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers VI: The Group-Lasso Block Update Is Zero iff ‖Aᵢᵀv‖₂ ≤ λ/ρ, Otherwise Ridge with ν‖xᵢ‖₂ = λ/ρTextbook

Why distributed model fitting

Fitting a statistical model usually means solving a convex problem of the form

minimizel(Ax−b)+r(x),\text{minimize}\quad l(Ax-b)+r(x),minimizel(Ax−b)+r(x),

where A∈Rm×nA\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n holds one training example per row and one feature per column, b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm is the response, lll is a convex loss and rrr a convex regularizer. Least squares, the lasso, logistic regression and the support vector machine are all of this form. When either dimension is very large, or the data are stored on many machines, the problem has to be solved by processors that each see only a block of AAA.

Chapter 8 of Boyd, Parikh, Chu, Peleato and Eckstein's monograph on the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) (Found. Trends Mach. Learn. 3(1), 2011) shows how ADMM does this in two ways: by splitting AAA by rows (splitting across examples, §8.2), which turns the problem into a global consensus problem, and by splitting it by columns (splitting across features, §8.3), which turns it into a sharing problem. In both cases the method is only practical because the individual updates have closed forms or reduce to small standard problems. This mission formalizes those closed forms, culminating in the update for the group lasso.

Setting

Vectors are in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​; ∥x∥1=∑j∣xj∣\|x\|_1=\sum_j|x_j|∥x∥1​=∑j​∣xj​∣. Throughout, ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 is the ADMM penalty parameter and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 a regularization weight.

Splitting across examples. Partition AAA and bbb by rows into NNN blocks Ai∈Rmi×nA_i\in\mathbb R^{m_i\times n}Ai​∈Rmi​×n, bi∈Rmib_i\in\mathbb R^{m_i}bi​∈Rmi​. With scaled dual variables uiu_iui​ and averages xˉ=1N∑ixi\bar x=\frac1N\sum_ix_ixˉ=N1​∑i​xi​, uˉ=1N∑iui\bar u=\frac1N\sum_iu_iuˉ=N1​∑i​ui​, the consensus ADMM iteration is

xik+1=argmin⁡xi(li(Aixi−bi)+ρ2∥xi−zk+uik∥22),zk+1=argmin⁡z(r(z)+Nρ2∥z−xˉk+1−uˉk∥22),x_i^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_{x_i}\Bigl(l_i(A_ix_i-b_i)+\tfrac{\rho}{2}\|x_i-z^k+u_i^k\|_2^2\Bigr),\quad z^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_{z}\Bigl(r(z)+\tfrac{N\rho}{2}\|z-\bar x^{k+1}-\bar u^k\|_2^2\Bigr),xik+1​=xi​argmin​(li​(Ai​xi​−bi​)+2ρ​∥xi​−zk+uik​∥22​),zk+1=zargmin​(r(z)+2Nρ​∥z−xˉk+1−uˉk∥22​),

followed by uik+1=uik+xik+1−zk+1u_i^{k+1}=u_i^k+x_i^{k+1}-z^{k+1}uik+1​=uik​+xik+1​−zk+1. For the lasso, l(w)=12∥w∥22l(w)=\frac12\|w\|_2^2l(w)=21​∥w∥22​ and r=λ∥⋅∥1r=\lambda\|\cdot\|_1r=λ∥⋅∥1​.

Splitting across features. Partition x=(x1,…,xN)x=(x_1,\dots,x_N)x=(x1​,…,xN​) with xi∈Rnix_i\in\mathbb R^{n_i}xi​∈Rni​ and A=[A1⋯AN]A=[A_1\cdots A_N]A=[A1​⋯AN​] with Ai∈Rm×niA_i\in\mathbb R^{m\times n_i}Ai​∈Rm×ni​, so Ax=∑iAixiAx=\sum_iA_ix_iAx=∑i​Ai​xi​. Introducing zi=Aixiz_i=A_ix_izi​=Ai​xi​ gives a sharing problem; its ADMM zzz-update minimizes l(∑izi−b)+∑iρ2∥Aixi−zi+ui∥22l(\sum_iz_i-b)+\sum_i\frac\rho2\|A_ix_i-z_i+u_i\|_2^2l(∑i​zi​−b)+∑i​2ρ​∥Ai​xi​−zi​+ui​∥22​. Writing Ax‾=1N∑iAixi\overline{Ax}=\frac1N\sum_iA_ix_iAx=N1​∑i​Ai​xi​ and zˉ\bar zzˉ for the average of the ziz_izi​, this reduces to a single problem in zˉ∈Rm\bar z\in\mathbb R^mzˉ∈Rm, all dual variables coincide, and each block update minimizes

ρ2∥Aixi−v∥22+ri(xi)\tfrac{\rho}{2}\|A_ix_i-v\|_2^2+r_i(x_i)2ρ​∥Ai​xi​−v∥22​+ri​(xi​)

for a vector v∈Rmv\in\mathbb R^mv∈Rm assembled from the previous iterate. For the group lasso, ri(xi)=λ∥xi∥2r_i(x_i)=\lambda\|x_i\|_2ri​(xi​)=λ∥xi​∥2​ (not squared).

Soft thresholding is Sκ(a)=a−κS_\kappa(a)=a-\kappaSκ​(a)=a−κ for a>κa>\kappaa>κ, 000 for ∣a∣≤κ|a|\le\kappa∣a∣≤κ, a+κa+\kappaa+κ for a<−κa<-\kappaa<−κ.

Formalization targets

Goal: the group-lasso block update (§8.3.2, pp. 69–70)

Let h(x)=ρ2∥Aix−v∥22+λ∥x∥2h(x)=\frac\rho2\|A_ix-v\|_2^2+\lambda\|x\|_2h(x)=2ρ​∥Ai​x−v∥22​+λ∥x∥2​ on Rni\mathbb R^{n_i}Rni​ and x(ν)=(AiTAi+νI)−1AiTvx(\nu)=(A_i^TA_i+\nu I)^{-1}A_i^Tvx(ν)=(AiT​Ai​+νI)−1AiT​v. Then

0∈argmin⁡h  ⟺  ∥AiTv∥2≤λ/ρ,0\in\operatorname*{argmin}h\iff\|A_i^Tv\|_2\le\lambda/\rho,0∈argminh⟺∥AiT​v∥2​≤λ/ρ,

and then 000 is the only minimizer; if ∥AiTv∥2>λ/ρ\|A_i^Tv\|_2>\lambda/\rho∥AiT​v∥2​>λ/ρ, there is exactly one ν>0\nu>0ν>0 with ν∥x(ν)∥2=λ/ρ\nu\|x(\nu)\|_2=\lambda/\rhoν∥x(ν)∥2​=λ/ρ, the point x(ν)x(\nu)x(ν) minimizes hhh, and every minimizer is of this form.

Milestones

  1. Ridge xix_ixi​-update (§8.2.1, p. 65): xik+1=(AiTAi+ρI)−1(AiTbi+ρ(zk−uik))x_i^{k+1}=(A_i^TA_i+\rho I)^{-1}(A_i^Tb_i+\rho(z^k-u_i^k))xik+1​=(AiT​Ai​+ρI)−1(AiT​bi​+ρ(zk−uik​)), the unique minimizer.
  2. Soft-thresholding zzz-update (§8.2.1, p. 65): zk+1=Sλ/(ρN)(xˉk+1+uˉk)z^{k+1}=S_{\lambda/(\rho N)}(\bar x^{k+1}+\bar u^k)zk+1=Sλ/(ρN)​(xˉk+1+uˉk) componentwise.
  3. Reduction to zˉ\bar zzˉ and equal duals (§8.3, p. 68): minimizers of the NNN-block zzz-update are exactly the vectors zi=zˉ+Aixi+ui−Ax‾−uˉz_i=\bar z+A_ix_i+u_i-\overline{Ax}-\bar uzi​=zˉ+Ai​xi​+ui​−Ax−uˉ with zˉ\bar zzˉ solving the zˉ\bar zzˉ-update, and then uik+1=Ax‾k+1+uˉk−zˉk+1u_i^{k+1}=\overline{Ax}^{k+1}+\bar u^k-\bar z^{k+1}uik+1​=Axk+1+uˉk−zˉk+1 for every iii.
  4. Feature-split lasso zˉ\bar zzˉ-update (§8.3.1, p. 69): zˉk+1=(b+ρAx‾k+1+ρuk)/(N+ρ)\bar z^{k+1}=(b+\rho\overline{Ax}^{k+1}+\rho u^k)/(N+\rho)zˉk+1=(b+ρAxk+1+ρuk)/(N+ρ).
  5. Lasso zero test, corrected (§8.3.1, p. 69): 000 minimizes ρ2∥Aix−v∥22+λ∥x∥1\frac\rho2\|A_ix-v\|_2^2+\lambda\|x\|_12ρ​∥Ai​x−v∥22​+λ∥x∥1​ iff ∥AiTv∥∞≤λ/ρ\|A_i^Tv\|_\infty\le\lambda/\rho∥AiT​v∥∞​≤λ/ρ.
  6. Eigendecomposition identity (§8.3.2, p. 70): if AiTAi=Q diag(μ)QTA_i^TA_i=Q\,\mathbf{diag}(\mu)Q^TAiT​Ai​=Qdiag(μ)QT with QQQ orthogonal, then ∥x(ν)∥2=∥diag(μ+ν1)−1QTAiTv∥2\|x(\nu)\|_2=\|\mathbf{diag}(\mu+\nu\mathbf 1)^{-1}Q^TA_i^Tv\|_2∥x(ν)∥2​=∥diag(μ+ν1)−1QTAiT​v∥2​ for ν>0\nu>0ν>0.
  7. SVM zˉ\bar zzˉ-update (§8.3.4, pp. 70–71): the minimizer of 1T(Nzˉ+1)++ρ2∥zˉ−Ax‾−u∥22\mathbf 1^T(N\bar z+\mathbf 1)_++\frac\rho2\|\bar z-\overline{Ax}-u\|_2^21T(Nzˉ+1)+​+2ρ​∥zˉ−Ax−u∥22​ is a shifted soft thresholding of v=Ax‾+uv=\overline{Ax}+uv=Ax+u.

Significance

The goal result says that a group-lasso block either switches off entirely, which is how group sparsity arises, or solves a ridge regression whose ridge parameter is the unique root of a scalar monotone equation; this is what makes the distributed group lasso implementable with one cached factorization per block and a bisection. The milestones are the remaining closed forms that turn the two distributed schemes of Chapter 8 into concrete algorithms, and the reduction of milestone 3 is the structural fact that lets feature splitting carry a single dual variable.

The book derives these facts in running text and states them without proof. None of them is formalized on Prove2Me, and the book's printed zero test for the lasso (p. 69) uses the wrong norm; a machine-checked collection of the correct updates removes that kind of error from the record and gives later ADMM missions a verified library of update formulas.

Difficulty

Each statement is a characterization of all minimizers of a nonsmooth convex function, not a check that a formula satisfies a stationarity equation. For the goal, the nonsmooth term λ∥x∥2\lambda\|x\|_2λ∥x∥2​ has a kink at 000, hhh need not be strictly convex when AiA_iAi​ has a nontrivial kernel, and the existence and uniqueness of the parameter ν\nuν is part of the claim rather than an assumption: the obvious move of assuming a suitable ν\nuν and checking the formula proves nothing about the case split or about uniqueness, and the singular case of AiTAiA_i^TA_iAiT​Ai​ is exactly where naive arguments break. Milestone 3 must handle an arbitrary convex loss lll, with no closed form at all.

Formalization scope

Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); matrices are Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ acting through Matrix.toEuclideanLin; blocks are indexed by Fin N (0-based); the regularization weight λ\lambdaλ is lam; the eigenvalue vector the book also calls λ\lambdaλ (p. 70) is μ. "xxx minimizes FFF" is Mathlib's IsMinOn F Set.univ x. Iteration superscripts are dropped: each statement is about one update with the previous iterate given. Explicit choices:

  • ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and N≥1N\ge1N≥1 are hypotheses wherever the book uses them.
  • Closed forms are stated as "minimizer   ⟺  \iff⟺ formula", which contains existence and uniqueness; the book's "the solution" in §8.3.2 is stated as existence and uniqueness of ν\nuν plus a characterization of every minimizer, with no invertibility hypothesis on AiTAiA_i^TA_iAiT​Ai​.
  • (AiTAi+νI)−1(A_i^TA_i+\nu I)^{-1}(AiT​Ai​+νI)−1 is Mathlib's matrix inverse, used only for ν>0\nu>0ν>0, where it is the true inverse.
  • The loss in milestone 3 is real valued and convex, as in (8.1).
  • The lasso zero test is stated with ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​; the book prints ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​, which is false for the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ term.
  • The SVM zˉ\bar zzˉ-update uses the coefficient ρ/2\rho/2ρ/2 printed on p. 70, which matches the printed thresholds N/ρN/\rhoN/ρ.
  • The book's "assuming AiA_iAi​ is tall" (p. 70) is not imposed; the identity holds without it.

A statement that only checks that x(ν)x(\nu)x(ν) satisfies the optimality equation, or that assumes the parameter ν\nuν exists, does not capture the goal; the goal asserts existence and uniqueness of ν\nuν and describes every minimizer of hhh.

Contributions welcome: subgradient calculus for ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​ and ∥⋅∥1\|\cdot\|_1∥⋅∥1​ in EuclideanSpace, first-order optimality for convex quadratics plus a convex nonsmooth term, and the monotonicity of ν↦ν∥(M+νI)−1c∥2\nu\mapsto\nu\|(M+\nu I)^{-1}c\|_2ν↦ν∥(M+νI)−1c∥2​ for positive semidefinite MMM; these are reusable for every proximal and ADMM update.

Selected references

  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato, J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1):1–122, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000016
  • M. Yuan, Y. Lin, Model selection and estimation in regression with grouped variables, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 68(1):49–67, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9868.2005.00532.x
  • R. Tibshirani, Regression shrinkage and selection via the lasso, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 58(1):267–288, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1996.tb02080.x
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Programming in Hilbert Space: Gradient Projection x_{k+1} = P(x_k − ρ_k∇f(x_k)) with σ ≤ ρ_k ≤ 2ρ₀ − σ Stays in the Level Set, and for Convex f Drives f(x_k) to inf_C fResearch Paper

Motivation

Minimizing a smooth function over a closed convex set is the basic problem of constrained continuous optimization. When the constraint set is simple enough that the nearest point of the set to any given point can be computed (a ball, a box, an orthant, an affine subspace), the most direct method is the gradient projection method: take a gradient step and project back onto the set. The method is the ancestor of the projected gradient and proximal gradient algorithms used today in signal processing, machine learning, and optimal control, where the variable is often a function, so that the natural setting is an infinite-dimensional Hilbert space rather than Rn\mathbb R^nRn.

A. A. Goldstein's 1964 note in the Bulletin of the AMS (Goldstein 1964) is one of the two founding papers of the method, alongside the independent work of Levitin and Polyak (1966). It states, in a Hilbert space and with an explicit step-size window, that the iterates stay in the initial level set, that the objective values converge, and that under convexity they converge to the optimal value, with weak and strong convergence of the iterates under further hypotheses. Goldstein motivates the method by applications to control theory (Balakrishnan 1963; Goldstein, Minimizing functionals on Hilbert space, 1964).

Timeline.

  • 1959: Cheney and Goldstein study proximity maps (metric projections) onto convex sets and a fixed-point construction for the distance between two convex sets (Cheney–Goldstein 1959, cited by the note as [1]).
  • 1964: Goldstein, this note: the gradient projection method in Hilbert space with steps in [σ,2ρ0−σ][\sigma, 2\rho_0 - \sigma][σ,2ρ0​−σ].
  • 1966: Levitin and Polyak give the same method and convergence rates for constrained minimization.
  • 1987: Calamai and Moré extend the analysis to Armijo-type step rules and identification of the active constraints in Rn\mathbb R^nRn (Calamai–Moré 1987).

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product [x,y][x, y][x,y] and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥. Let C⊆HC \subseteq HC⊆H be closed and convex, and let P:H→HP : H \to HP:H→H be the projection onto CCC: P(x)P(x)P(x) is the point of CCC closest to xxx. In Lean, IsProjection C P says that P(x)∈CP(x) \in CP(x)∈C and ∥x−P(x)∥≤∥x−y∥\|x - P(x)\| \le \|x - y\|∥x−P(x)∥≤∥x−y∥ for all y∈Cy \in Cy∈C.

Let f:H→Rf : H \to \mathbb Rf:H→R, x0∈Cx_0 \in Cx0​∈C, and let

S={x∈C:f(x)≤f(x0)}S = \{x \in C : f(x) \le f(x_0)\}S={x∈C:f(x)≤f(x0​)}

be the level set (levelSet f C x0). Let S^\hat SS^ be an open set containing the convex hull of SSS. Write f′(x,h)f'(x, h)f′(x,h) for the Fréchet derivative of fff at xxx applied to hhh, ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) for the gradient (so f′(x,h)=[∇f(x),h]f'(x, h) = [\nabla f(x), h]f′(x,h)=[∇f(x),h]), and

f′′(x,h,h)=ddt∣t=0f′(x+th,h)f''(x, h, h) = \frac{d}{dt}\Big|_{t=0} f'(x + th, h)f′′(x,h,h)=dtd​​t=0​f′(x+th,h)

for the directional second derivative in the sense of Gâteaux (d2 f x h). The curvature hypothesis is that for some ρ0>0\rho_0 > 0ρ0​>0, at every x∈S^x \in \hat Sx∈S^ and for every h∈Hh \in Hh∈H, these derivatives exist and

∣f′′(x,h,h)∣≤∥h∥2ρ0.|f''(x, h, h)| \le \frac{\|h\|^2}{\rho_0}.∣f′′(x,h,h)∣≤ρ0​∥h∥2​.

Choose 0<σ≤ρ00 < \sigma \le \rho_00<σ≤ρ0​ and step sizes σ≤ρk≤2ρ0−σ\sigma \le \rho_k \le 2\rho_0 - \sigmaσ≤ρk​≤2ρ0​−σ. The method is

xk+1=P(xk−ρk∇f(xk)),k≥0.x_{k+1} = P\big(x_k - \rho_k \nabla f(x_k)\big), \qquad k \ge 0.xk+1​=P(xk​−ρk​∇f(xk​)),k≥0.

A point z∈Cz \in Cz∈C is stationary if P(z−ρ∇f(z))=zP(z - \rho \nabla f(z)) = zP(z−ρ∇f(z))=z for every ρ>0\rho > 0ρ>0.

Formalization targets

Goal: the THEOREM, parts (i)–(v)

Assume fff is bounded below and continuous on CCC. There is L∈RL \in \mathbb RL∈R such that

  1. (i) xk∈Sx_k \in Sxk​∈S for all kkk, xk+1−xk→0x_{k+1} - x_k \to 0xk+1​−xk​→0, and f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​) decreases to LLL;
  2. (ii) if SSS is compact, every cluster point zzz of (xk)(x_k)(xk​) near which ∇f\nabla f∇f is continuous is stationary, and a unique cluster point is the limit of (xk)(x_k)(xk​);
  3. (iii) if SSS is convex and f′′(x,h,h)≥μ∥h∥2f''(x, h, h) \ge \mu \|h\|^2f′′(x,h,h)≥μ∥h∥2 on SSS for some μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0, then
L=inf⁡{f(x):x∈C};L = \inf\{f(x) : x \in C\};L=inf{f(x):x∈C};
  1. (iv) under (iii) with SSS bounded, every weak cluster point of (xk)(x_k)(xk​) minimizes fff on CCC;
  2. (v) under (iii) with μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 and ∇f\nabla f∇f bounded on SSS, there is z∈Sz \in Sz∈S with f(z)=Lf(z) = Lf(z)=L, xk→zx_k \to zxk​→z in norm, and zzz is the unique minimizer of fff on CCC.

The goal is the whole theorem, because its five parts share one limit LLL and one standing setting.

Milestones

The projection inequality [x−y,P(x)−y]≥∥P(x)−y∥2[x - y, P(x) - y] \ge \|P(x) - y\|^2[x−y,P(x)−y]≥∥P(x)−y∥2 for y∈Cy \in Cy∈C; the Lipschitz property of PPP; the characterization of stationarity for convex fff at a differentiability point; the one-step Taylor estimate; the step lemma (for σ≤ρ≤2ρ0−σ\sigma \le \rho \le 2\rho_0 - \sigmaσ≤ρ≤2ρ0​−σ the new point stays in SSS and the decrease is at least ∥xk+1−xk∥2σ/4ρ02\|x_{k+1} - x_k\|^2 \sigma / 4\rho_0^2∥xk+1​−xk​∥2σ/4ρ02​); parts (i) and (ii); the strong-convexity bound f(x)≥f(y)+[∇f(y),x−y]+12μ∥x−y∥2f(x) \ge f(y) + [\nabla f(y), x - y] + \frac12\mu\|x - y\|^2f(x)≥f(y)+[∇f(y),x−y]+21​μ∥x−y∥2 on SSS; the supporting-hyperplane inequality of the proof of (iii); parts (iii), (iv) and (v). A companion item states the last clause of (ii) under convexity of fff on CCC.

Significance

The result. The theorem gives a step-size rule that needs only a curvature bound near the level set, not a global Lipschitz constant of the gradient, and it covers the infinite-dimensional case directly: (iii) gives convergence of the objective values to the optimal value without assuming that a minimizer exists, (iv) yields minimizers as weak cluster points when the level set is bounded, and (v) gives strong convergence of the iterates under strong convexity on the level set. These are the prototypes of the convergence statements now proved for projected and proximal gradient methods.

Formalizing it. The result is classical and proved on paper; it has no machine-checked proof. The note is two pages long and its proof is terse ("The proof of (ii) being straightforward"), and checking it in Lean exposes two places where the printed statement needs repair (see Formalization scope). A complete development also produces reusable infrastructure: the variational inequality and Lipschitz property of the metric projection in a Hilbert space, a one-dimensional Taylor estimate from a Gâteaux second derivative along a segment, and weak lower semicontinuity of convex continuous functions on closed convex sets used through cluster points in WeakSpace.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for (i) applies a quadratic upper bound for fff along the segment from xkx_kxk​ to xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​. That bound is only available where the curvature hypothesis holds, on S^\hat SS^, and nothing guarantees in advance that xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​, or the segment, lies in S^\hat SS^. Ruling this out requires control of fff up to the boundary of the level set, which the printed hypotheses do not give; this is where the added continuity hypothesis enters. In (iii) the iterates may be unbounded and no minimizer need exist, so compactness arguments are unavailable. In (iv) the cluster points are weak, so norm-closedness arguments do not apply directly.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is a real Hilbert space: [NormedAddCommGroup H] [InnerProductSpace ℝ H] [CompleteSpace H]. The inner product [x,y][x, y][x,y] is ⟪x, y⟫_ℝ, and ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient f.
  • PPP is any map with IsProjection C P; there is no chosen projection and no junk value.
  • f′′(x,h,h)f''(x, h, h)f′′(x,h,h) is the derivative at t=0t = 0t=0 of t↦f′(x+th,h)t \mapsto f'(x + th, h)t↦f′(x+th,h). The hypothesis on S^\hat SS^ (SecondDerivBound) states both differentiabilities before the bound, so the bound is never on a junk zero.
  • The run starts at x0x_0x0​, and 0<σ≤ρ00 < \sigma \le \rho_00<σ≤ρ0​ makes the step window nonempty.
  • "L=inf⁡L = \infL=inf" is IsGLB (f '' C) L. Weak cluster points are cluster points in WeakSpace ℝ H.
  • Added hypothesis: fff is continuous on CCC. Part (i) as printed is false without it: on H=C=RH = C = \mathbb RH=C=R with P=idP = \mathrm{id}P=id, f(x)=(x−2)2f(x) = (x - 2)^2f(x)=(x−2)2 for x<1x < 1x<1 and f(x)=100f(x) = 100f(x)=100 for x≥1x \ge 1x≥1, x0=0x_0 = 0x0​=0, S^=(−1,1)\hat S = (-1, 1)S^=(−1,1), ρ0=1/2\rho_0 = 1/2ρ0​=1/2, σ=1/4\sigma = 1/4σ=1/4, ρk=1/2\rho_k = 1/2ρk​=1/2, the first step lands at x1=2x_1 = 2x1​=2 with f(x1)=100>f(x0)f(x_1) = 100 > f(x_0)f(x1​)=100>f(x0​).
  • Moved clause. The last clause of (ii), "zzz minimizes fff on CCC", is false for nonconvex fff (a unique cluster point can be a stationary point that is not a minimizer). The goal omits it, and a companion item states it under convexity of fff on CCC.
  • The goal assumes nothing about the step decrease, the step size ρ^\hat\rhoρ^​ of the proof, or the iterates beyond the run's definition. A formalization that adds such facts as hypotheses, or that proves only one of the five parts, does not count as closing the goal.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, in particular the projection inequality and Lipschitz property (independent of the rest), the Taylor estimate from the Gâteaux second derivative, and the weak-closedness argument of (iv).

Selected references

  • A. A. Goldstein, Convex programming in Hilbert space, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 70 (1964), 709–710. https://doi.org/10.1090/s0002-9904-1964-11178-2
  • E. W. Cheney and A. A. Goldstein, Proximity maps for convex sets, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 10 (1959), 448–450.
  • A. V. Balakrishnan, An operator theoretic formulation of a class of control problems and a steepest descent method of solution, J. SIAM Control Ser. A 1 (1963), 109–127.
  • E. S. Levitin and B. T. Polyak, Constrained minimization methods, USSR Comput. Math. Math. Phys. 6(5) (1966), 1–50.
  • P. H. Calamai and J. J. Moré, Projected gradient methods for linearly constrained problems, Math. Programming 39 (1987), 93–116. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02592073
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers IV: The Covariance-Selection X-Update Is Q·diag((λᵢ + √(λᵢ² + 4ρ))/(2ρ))·QᵀTextbook

Why closed-form ADMM updates for ℓ1 problems

Many estimation problems in statistics, machine learning and signal processing minimize a smooth loss plus a nonsmooth ℓ1-type regularizer: the lasso, basis pursuit, least absolute deviations, Huber fitting, the group lasso, and ℓ1-penalized maximum likelihood for Gaussian graphical models. Chapter 6 of Boyd, Parikh, Chu, Peleato and Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers (Found. Trends Mach. Learn. 3(1), 2011), shows that the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) splits each of these problems into a step that touches only the loss and a step that touches only the regularizer, and that each step has a closed form. The practical value of ADMM on these problems rests entirely on those closed forms: an iteration is one cached linear solve, one projection, or one thresholding.

The capstone is sparse inverse covariance selection (§6.5), the ℓ1-penalized Gaussian maximum-likelihood problem of Banerjee, El Ghaoui and d'Aspremont (2008), also solved by the graphical lasso of Friedman, Hastie and Tibshirani (2008). Its ADMM X-update minimizes a log-determinant objective over positive definite matrices, and the book shows that it is solved exactly by one symmetric eigenvalue decomposition.

Setting

All vectors are real and ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​ is the Euclidean norm. For κ∈R\kappa\in\mathbb Rκ∈R the soft thresholding operator is Sκ(a)=a−κS_\kappa(a)=a-\kappaSκ​(a)=a−κ if a>κa>\kappaa>κ, 000 if ∣a∣≤κ|a|\le\kappa∣a∣≤κ, and a+κa+\kappaa+κ if a<−κa<-\kappaa<−κ, applied componentwise to vectors and entrywise to matrices. The vector soft thresholding operator on Rm\mathbb R^mRm is Sκ(a)=(1−κ/∥a∥2)+a\mathcal S_\kappa(a)=(1-\kappa/\|a\|_2)_+aSκ​(a)=(1−κ/∥a∥2​)+​a, with Sκ(0)=0\mathcal S_\kappa(0)=0Sκ​(0)=0. The Huber penalty is ghub(a)=a2/2g^{\mathrm{hub}}(a)=a^2/2ghub(a)=a2/2 for ∣a∣≤1|a|\le1∣a∣≤1 and ∣a∣−1/2|a|-1/2∣a∣−1/2 for ∣a∣>1|a|>1∣a∣>1, summed over components for vectors.

In scaled-form ADMM for minimizing f(x)+g(z)f(x)+g(z)f(x)+g(z) subject to Ax+Bz=cAx+Bz=cAx+Bz=c, with penalty ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 and scaled dual variable uuu, the updates are

xk+1=argmin⁡x(f(x)+ρ2∥Ax+Bzk−c+uk∥22),zk+1=argmin⁡z(g(z)+ρ2∥Axk+1+Bz−c+uk∥22),x^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_x\bigl(f(x)+\tfrac\rho2\|Ax+Bz^k-c+u^k\|_2^2\bigr),\quad z^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_z\bigl(g(z)+\tfrac\rho2\|Ax^{k+1}+Bz-c+u^k\|_2^2\bigr),xk+1=xargmin​(f(x)+2ρ​∥Ax+Bzk−c+uk∥22​),zk+1=zargmin​(g(z)+2ρ​∥Axk+1+Bz−c+uk∥22​),

followed by uk+1=uk+Axk+1+Bzk+1−cu^{k+1}=u^k+Ax^{k+1}+Bz^{k+1}-cuk+1=uk+Axk+1+Bzk+1−c. "The update is given by formula FFF" means FFF is the unique minimizer of the corresponding subproblem.

For sparse inverse covariance selection, S∈Rn×nS\in\mathbb R^{n\times n}S∈Rn×n is symmetric (the empirical covariance), λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 is the regularization weight, ∥M∥F2=∑ijMij2\|M\|_F^2=\sum_{ij}M_{ij}^2∥M∥F2​=∑ij​Mij2​, ∥M∥1=∑ij∣Mij∣\|M\|_1=\sum_{ij}|M_{ij}|∥M∥1​=∑ij​∣Mij​∣, and S++n\mathbb S^n_{++}S++n​ is the set of symmetric positive definite matrices, the domain of log⁡det⁡\log\detlogdet. ADMM alternates

Xk+1=argmin⁡X∈S++n(Tr⁡(SX)−log⁡det⁡X+ρ2∥X−Zk+Uk∥F2),Zk+1=argmin⁡Z(λ∥Z∥1+ρ2∥Xk+1−Z+Uk∥F2),X^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_{X\in\mathbb S^n_{++}}\Bigl(\operatorname{Tr}(SX)-\log\det X+\tfrac\rho2\|X-Z^k+U^k\|_F^2\Bigr),\qquad Z^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_Z\Bigl(\lambda\|Z\|_1+\tfrac\rho2\|X^{k+1}-Z+U^k\|_F^2\Bigr),Xk+1=X∈S++n​argmin​(Tr(SX)−logdetX+2ρ​∥X−Zk+Uk∥F2​),Zk+1=Zargmin​(λ∥Z∥1​+2ρ​∥Xk+1−Z+Uk∥F2​),

and Uk+1=Uk+Xk+1−Zk+1U^{k+1}=U^k+X^{k+1}-Z^{k+1}Uk+1=Uk+Xk+1−Zk+1.

Formalization targets

Goal: the X-update in closed form (§6.5, p. 47)

Let SSS and Z−UZ-UZ−U be symmetric, ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, and ρ(Z−U)−S=Q diag(μ1,…,μn) QT\rho(Z-U)-S=Q\,\mathrm{diag}(\mu_1,\dots,\mu_n)\,Q^Tρ(Z−U)−S=Qdiag(μ1​,…,μn​)QT with QTQ=QQT=IQ^TQ=QQ^T=IQTQ=QQT=I. Then

X=Q diag(μi+μi2+4ρ2ρ)QTX=Q\,\mathrm{diag}\Bigl(\frac{\mu_i+\sqrt{\mu_i^2+4\rho}}{2\rho}\Bigr)Q^TX=Qdiag(2ρμi​+μi2​+4ρ​​)QT

is positive definite and is the unique minimizer of Tr⁡(SX′)−log⁡det⁡X′+ρ2∥X′−Z+U∥F2\operatorname{Tr}(SX')-\log\det X'+\frac\rho2\|X'-Z+U\|_F^2Tr(SX′)−logdetX′+2ρ​∥X′−Z+U∥F2​ over X′∈S++nX'\in\mathbb S^n_{++}X′∈S++n​.

Milestones

  1. Scalar root (p. 47): for ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, t=(μ+μ2+4ρ)/(2ρ)t=(\mu+\sqrt{\mu^2+4\rho})/(2\rho)t=(μ+μ2+4ρ​)/(2ρ) is positive and ρt−1/t=μ\rho t-1/t=\muρt−1/t=μ.
  2. Equation (6.5) (p. 47): the matrix XXX above is positive definite and ρX−X−1=ρ(Z−U)−S\rho X-X^{-1}=\rho(Z-U)-SρX−X−1=ρ(Z−U)−S.
  3. First-order condition (p. 47): a positive definite XXX minimizes the X-objective over S++n\mathbb S^n_{++}S++n​ if and only if S−X−1+ρ(X−Z+U)=0S-X^{-1}+\rho(X-Z+U)=0S−X−1+ρ(X−Z+U)=0.
  4. Z-update (p. 47): Zij=Sλ/ρ(Xij+Uij)Z_{ij}=S_{\lambda/\rho}(X_{ij}+U_{ij})Zij​=Sλ/ρ​(Xij​+Uij​) is the unique minimizer of λ∥Z∥1+ρ2∥X−Z+U∥F2\lambda\|Z\|_1+\frac\rho2\|X-Z+U\|_F^2λ∥Z∥1​+2ρ​∥X−Z+U∥F2​.
  5. Huber z-update (§6.1.1, p. 40): with v=Ax−b+uv=Ax-b+uv=Ax−b+u, z=ρ1+ρv+11+ρS1+1/ρ(v)z=\frac{\rho}{1+\rho}v+\frac1{1+\rho}S_{1+1/\rho}(v)z=1+ρρ​v+1+ρ1​S1+1/ρ​(v) minimizes ghub(z)+ρ2∥Ax−z−b+u∥22g^{\mathrm{hub}}(z)+\frac\rho2\|Ax-z-b+u\|_2^2ghub(z)+2ρ​∥Ax−z−b+u∥22​.
  6. Basis pursuit (§6.2, p. 41): if AATAA^TAAT is invertible, (I−AT(AAT)−1A)(z−u)+AT(AAT)−1b(I-A^T(AA^T)^{-1}A)(z-u)+A^T(AA^T)^{-1}b(I−AT(AAT)−1A)(z−u)+AT(AAT)−1b is the projection of z−uz-uz−u onto {x∣Ax=b}\{x\mid Ax=b\}{x∣Ax=b}.
  7. Lasso (§6.4, p. 43): (ATA+ρI)−1(ATb+ρ(z−u))(A^TA+\rho I)^{-1}(A^Tb+\rho(z-u))(ATA+ρI)−1(ATb+ρ(z−u)) minimizes 12∥Ax−b∥22+ρ2∥x−z+u∥22\frac12\|Ax-b\|_2^2+\frac\rho2\|x-z+u\|_2^221​∥Ax−b∥22​+2ρ​∥x−z+u∥22​, and Sλ/ρ(x+u)S_{\lambda/\rho}(x+u)Sλ/ρ​(x+u) minimizes λ∥z∥1+ρ2∥x−z+u∥22\lambda\|z\|_1+\frac\rho2\|x-z+u\|_2^2λ∥z∥1​+2ρ​∥x−z+u∥22​.
  8. Group lasso (§6.4.2, p. 45): blockwise Sλ/ρ(xi+ui)\mathcal S_{\lambda/\rho}(x_i+u_i)Sλ/ρ​(xi​+ui​) minimizes λ∑i∥zi∥2+ρ2∑i∥xi−zi+ui∥22\lambda\sum_i\|z_i\|_2+\frac\rho2\sum_i\|x_i-z_i+u_i\|_2^2λ∑i​∥zi​∥2​+2ρ​∑i​∥xi​−zi​+ui​∥22​.

Significance

The closed forms are what make ADMM competitive on these problems. For the lasso the x-update is a ridge regression whose factorization is computed once; for basis pursuit it is a cached projection; the ℓ1 step is a componentwise threshold. For covariance selection the X-update costs one eigenvalue decomposition, and the book (p. 46) cites Scheinberg, Ma and Goldfarb (2010) as showing that ADMM outperforms state-of-the-art methods on this problem. The goal also yields that Xk+1X^{k+1}Xk+1 is always positive definite, so the iterates remain in the domain of log⁡det⁡\log\detlogdet without a line search.

All statements here are classical and their proofs are elementary convex analysis and linear algebra. A search of the platform found no machine-checked version of any of them. Formalizing them produces verified proximity operators (soft thresholding, vector soft thresholding, Huber, projection onto an affine set) and a verified matrix-function argument for log⁡det⁡\log\detlogdet that later missions on ADMM, proximal methods and Gaussian graphical models can import.

Difficulty

The vector updates reduce to separable one-dimensional problems or to a normal equation, and the difficulty there is bookkeeping: uniqueness, the case a=0a=0a=0 of vector soft thresholding, and the three regimes of the Huber prox.

The goal is harder. The book's argument says that XXX satisfies the gradient equation "and thus minimizes the X-minimization objective". Checking the equation is algebra; the claim to be proved is minimality over the open cone S++n\mathbb S^n_{++}S++n​, which needs the convexity (indeed strict convexity, for uniqueness) of −log⁡det⁡-\log\det−logdet on positive definite matrices and the identification of its gradient with −X−1-X^{-1}−X−1 along symmetric directions. Mathlib has determinants and positive definiteness; a usable convexity statement for log⁡det⁡\log\detlogdet on S++n\mathbb S^n_{++}S++n​ is not among the platform's published results. Showing that XXX satisfies (6.5) alone does not establish the goal.

Formalization scope

  • Carriers. Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), matrices Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ acting by Matrix.toEuclideanLin. The Frobenius norm and the entrywise ℓ1 norm are written as explicit sums, not through Mathlib's matrix norm instances. The vector ℓ1 norm is the platform definition HighDimStat.SparseLinear.l1Norm.
  • Updates as unique minimizers. Each update is stated as: the book's formula is the unique minimizer of the subproblem (IsUniqueMinimizerOn). Iterates are not defined; the subproblem's data (zkz^kzk, uku^kuk, xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1) are arbitrary.
  • Domain of log det. The X-objective is minimized over Matrix.PosDef only. Singular or indefinite matrices are never competitors, so Real.log of a nonpositive determinant plays no role.
  • Explicit hypotheses. SSS and Z−UZ-UZ−U are assumed symmetric in the goal and the first-order condition; SSS need not be positive semidefinite. ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 everywhere. Basis pursuit assumes det⁡(AAT)≠0\det(AA^T)\ne0det(AAT)=0, which the book uses without stating. The book's λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 is relaxed to λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0 in the thresholding statements, which contain the book's case.
  • Eigendecomposition. The goal holds for every orthogonal QQQ and real μ\muμ with ρ(Z−U)−S=Q diag(μ)QT\rho(Z-U)-S=Q\,\mathrm{diag}(\mu)Q^Tρ(Z−U)−S=Qdiag(μ)QT, not for one decomposition chosen by Mathlib.
  • Names. The book uses λ\lambdaλ for both the regularization weight and the eigenvalues; Lean calls them lam and μ.
  • Typo. The book prints uku^kuk in the group-lasso block update; the block uiku_i^kuik​ is stated.
  • Ruled out. A goal that only asserts that XXX satisfies (6.5), or that minimizes over a set extended by Real.log of nonpositive determinants, is not the book's claim; the goal states unique minimality over S++n\mathbb S^n_{++}S++n​.
  • Not stated. Least absolute deviations and the generalized lasso updates (same pattern as milestones 5 and 7), the overlapping group lasso, and the two-step termination claim for Huber fitting on p. 40 (whose formula xls=(ATA)−1bx^{\mathrm{ls}}=(A^TA)^{-1}bxls=(ATA)−1b is misprinted).

Contributions welcome: convexity and strict convexity of −log⁡det⁡-\log\det−logdet on S++n\mathbb S^n_{++}S++n​ and its derivative; a general "prox of a separable function is componentwise" lemma; and the projection onto an affine set.

Selected references

  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato, J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1), 2011, pp. 1–122. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000016
  • O. Banerjee, L. El Ghaoui, A. d'Aspremont, Model Selection Through Sparse Maximum Likelihood Estimation for Multivariate Gaussian or Binary Data, Journal of Machine Learning Research 9, 2008, pp. 485–516. https://jmlr.org/papers/v9/banerjee08a.html
  • J. Friedman, T. Hastie, R. Tibshirani, Sparse Inverse Covariance Estimation with the Graphical Lasso, Biostatistics 9(3), 2008, pp. 432–441. https://doi.org/10.1093/biostatistics/kxm045
  • K. Scheinberg, S. Ma, D. Goldfarb, Sparse Inverse Covariance Selection via Alternating Linearization Methods, Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems 23, 2010 (reference [148] of the book).
  • R. Tibshirani, Regression Shrinkage and Selection via the Lasso, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 58(1), 1996, pp. 267–288. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1996.tb02080.x
  • M. Yuan, Y. Lin, Model Selection and Estimation in Regression with Grouped Variables, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 68(1), 2006, pp. 49–67. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9868.2005.00532.x
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers V: Sharing ADMM — the z-Update Reduces to One n-Variable Problem and the Dual Variables AgreeTextbook

Why consensus and sharing

Many large optimization problems arising in statistics, machine learning, signal processing and resource allocation have an objective that is a sum of terms, each depending on data held by a different processor, or a coupling term that depends on the sum of the agents' decisions. Chapter 7 of Boyd, Parikh, Chu, Peleato and Eckstein's monograph on the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) (Found. Trends Mach. Learn. 3(1), 2011) introduces two templates that turn such problems into distributed algorithms: consensus and sharing. Nearly every distributed application in the rest of the monograph (distributed lasso, distributed logistic regression, splitting across examples and across features in Chapter 8) is an instance of one of the two. Consensus problems in the context of ADMM go back to Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis (Parallel and Distributed Computation, 1989).

The value of the templates lies in a handful of exact algebraic facts about the ADMM subproblems: the global update is an average, the dual variables average to zero, and the sharing update, which looks like a problem in NnNnNn variables, is really a problem in nnn variables. These facts are what this mission formalizes.

Setting

There are N≥1N\ge1N≥1 agents. Vectors live in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean inner product, and an overline denotes an average over agents, vˉ=1N∑i=1Nvi\bar v=\frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N v_ivˉ=N1​∑i=1N​vi​. Each local cost fif_ifi​ and the shared cost ggg are functions into R∪{+∞}\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}R∪{+∞}. The penalty parameter is ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0.

Global variable consensus (§7.1) is the problem

minimize ∑i=1Nfi(xi)subject to xi−z=0, i=1,…,N,\text{minimize }\sum_{i=1}^N f_i(x_i)\quad\text{subject to } x_i-z=0,\ i=1,\dots,N,minimize i=1∑N​fi​(xi​)subject to xi​−z=0, i=1,…,N,

with local variables xi∈Rnx_i\in\mathbb R^nxi​∈Rn and a global variable zzz. ADMM alternates a parallel xix_ixi​-update, an averaging zzz-update and a dual update of the multipliers yiy_iyi​. With a regularizer g(z)g(z)g(z) added (7.2), the zzz-update (7.4) becomes a minimization involving ggg.

General form consensus (§7.2) lets local variable xi∈Rnix_i\in\mathbb R^{n_i}xi​∈Rni​ copy only some entries of zzz: entry jjj of xix_ixi​ corresponds to entry zG(i,j)z_{\mathcal G(i,j)}zG(i,j)​, and z~i∈Rni\tilde z_i\in\mathbb R^{n_i}z~i​∈Rni​ is defined by (z~i)j=zG(i,j)(\tilde z_i)_j=z_{\mathcal G(i,j)}(z~i​)j​=zG(i,j)​. The number of local entries copying zgz_gzg​ is kgk_gkg​.

Sharing (§7.3) is the problem

minimize ∑i=1Nfi(xi)+g(∑i=1Nxi),(7.11)\text{minimize }\sum_{i=1}^N f_i(x_i)+g\Big(\sum_{i=1}^N x_i\Big),\tag{7.11}minimize i=1∑N​fi​(xi​)+g(i=1∑N​xi​),(7.11)

written for ADMM with copies ziz_izi​ of the xix_ixi​ (7.12). In scaled form, with ai=uik+xik+1a_i=u_i^k+x_i^{k+1}ai​=uik​+xik+1​, its zzz-update is

(z1k+1,…,zNk+1)∈argmin⁡z1,…,zN g(∑i=1Nzi)+(ρ/2)∑i=1N∥zi−ai∥22,(z_1^{k+1},\dots,z_N^{k+1})\in\operatorname*{argmin}_{z_1,\dots,z_N}\ g\Big(\sum_{i=1}^N z_i\Big)+(\rho/2)\sum_{i=1}^N\|z_i-a_i\|_2^2,(z1k+1​,…,zNk+1​)∈z1​,…,zN​argmin​ g(i=1∑N​zi​)+(ρ/2)i=1∑N​∥zi​−ai​∥22​,

followed by uik+1=uik+xik+1−zik+1u_i^{k+1}=u_i^k+x_i^{k+1}-z_i^{k+1}uik+1​=uik​+xik+1​−zik+1​.

Formalization targets

Goal: the sharing zzz-update reduction (§7.3, p. 57)

For every a1,…,aNa_1,\dots,a_Na1​,…,aN​: (z1,…,zN)(z_1,\dots,z_N)(z1​,…,zN​) solves the NnNnNn-variable zzz-update iff zˉ\bar zzˉ solves

minimize⁡zˉ∈Rn g(Nzˉ)+(ρ/2)∑i=1N∥zˉ−aˉ∥22\operatorname*{minimize}_{\bar z\in\mathbb R^n}\ g(N\bar z)+(\rho/2)\sum_{i=1}^N\|\bar z-\bar a\|_2^2zˉ∈Rnminimize​ g(Nzˉ)+(ρ/2)i=1∑N​∥zˉ−aˉ∥22​

and

zi=ai+zˉ−aˉ(7.13);z_i=a_i+\bar z-\bar a\quad (7.13);zi​=ai​+zˉ−aˉ(7.13);

and along every run of sharing ADMM,

uik+1=uˉk+xˉk+1−zˉk+1(7.14),u_i^{k+1}=\bar u^k+\bar x^{k+1}-\bar z^{k+1}\quad(7.14),uik+1​=uˉk+xˉk+1−zˉk+1(7.14),

so all scaled dual variables agree after one step.

Milestones

  • §7.1: the consensus zzz-update is zk+1=xˉk+1+(1/ρ)yˉkz^{k+1}=\bar x^{k+1}+(1/\rho)\bar y^kzk+1=xˉk+1+(1/ρ)yˉ​k; then yˉk+1=0\bar y^{k+1}=0yˉ​k+1=0, zk=xˉkz^k=\bar x^kzk=xˉk and the simplified iteration.
  • (7.4), §7.1.1: with a regularizer, the zzz-update is averaging followed by a proximal step with weight NρN\rhoNρ; the soft-threshold (g=λ∥⋅∥1g=\lambda\|\cdot\|_1g=λ∥⋅∥1​) and positive-part (ggg the indicator of R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​) examples.
  • §7.2: the general form zzz-update is local averaging, and the dual entries attached to each global index sum to zero after the first iteration.
  • (7.13): with zˉ\bar zzˉ fixed, zi=ai+zˉ−aˉz_i=a_i+\bar z-\bar azi​=ai​+zˉ−aˉ is the unique minimizer.

Significance

The reduction is what makes sharing ADMM scale: the central step needs only the averages xˉk+1\bar x^{k+1}xˉk+1, uˉk\bar u^kuˉk and one nnn-dimensional proximal problem, regardless of the number of agents, and the dual state collapses to a single vector. The same reduction underlies exchange ADMM (§7.3.2) and the splitting-across-features algorithms of §8.3. The consensus facts explain why the fusion center only averages and why the dual variables can be dropped from its update.

All results of the chapter are proved, informally, in the monograph; they are elementary. To our knowledge none has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces checked statements of the update formulas that later chapters of the series and distributed-optimization developments can cite instead of re-deriving.

Difficulty

The statements are exact identities between minimizer sets of nonsmooth problems in which ggg may be any extended-real-valued function: there is no first-order condition to use, so each step must be argued by comparing objective values, and the iff requires producing, for an arbitrary competitor, a competitor of the reduced problem with no larger value. The index bookkeeping is the other half: averages of sums of sequences indexed by agents and by iterations, the off-by-one in "after the first iteration", and in §7.2 sums over the fibres {(i,j):G(i,j)=g}\{(i,j):\mathcal G(i,j)=g\}{(i,j):G(i,j)=g} of an index map between local vectors of different dimensions.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); agents are indexed by Fin N, so the book's i=1,…,Ni=1,\dots,Ni=1,…,N is Lean's i−1i-1i−1; components are 0-based as well.
  • An extended-real-valued function is encoded by its effective domain (a set) and its finite values; every minimization is over the domain. Convexity is not assumed: none of the stated identities needs it, so the statements are slightly more general than the chapter's standing assumption that each fif_ifi​ is convex.
  • Iterates are hypotheses: a run is any sequence satisfying the update rules (argmin properties, not chosen minimizers). The consensus run uses the averaging formula exactly as printed on p. 49; the general form and sharing runs use the argmin form printed on pp. 55–56.
  • Explicit hypotheses that the book leaves implicit: N≥1N\ge1N≥1, ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 (named lam), kg≥1k_g\ge1kg​≥1 for every global index ggg in §7.2, and the index ranges k≥1k\ge1k≥1 for yˉk=0\bar y^{k}=0yˉ​k=0 and k≥2k\ge2k≥2 for zk=xˉkz^k=\bar x^kzk=xˉk (the starting y0y^0y0 is arbitrary).
  • Corrected misprints: p. 52 prints xˉk+1−(1/ρ)yˉk\bar x^{k+1}-(1/\rho)\bar y^kxˉk+1−(1/ρ)yˉ​k in the soft-threshold and positive-part examples, while the proximal form gives xˉk+1+(1/ρ)yˉk\bar x^{k+1}+(1/\rho)\bar y^kxˉk+1+(1/ρ)yˉ​k; p. 55 prints ∑i=1m\sum_{i=1}^m∑i=1m​ for ∑i=1N\sum_{i=1}^N∑i=1N​; p. 57 writes u∈Rmu\in\mathbf R^mu∈Rm for a vector of Rn\mathbb R^nRn.
  • The goal is about minimizers of the NnNnNn-variable zzz-subproblem, not the algebraic identity (7.13) alone, and (7.14) is derived for every run rather than built into a single-dual-variable definition; either shortcut would make the goal trivial.
  • Not included: the consensus residual norms (p. 51), the duality discussion of §7.3.1 and exchange ADMM (§7.3.2). Contributions formalizing them on top of these definitions are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato, J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1), 1–122, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000016
  • D. P. Bertsekas, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods, Prentice Hall, 1989. https://web.mit.edu/dimitrib/www/pdc.html
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimal TransportOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Data-Driven Distributionally Robust Optimization Using the Wasserstein Metric: Performance Guarantees and Tractable Reformulations II: Worst-Case Distributions from a Finite Convex ProgramResearch Paper

Motivation

In data-driven stochastic optimization a decision maker knows the distribution of an uncertain parameter ξ\xiξ only through NNN samples ξ^1,…,ξ^N\hat\xi_1,\dots,\hat\xi_Nξ^​1​,…,ξ^​N​. Wasserstein distributionally robust optimization hedges against this ignorance by evaluating a loss ℓ\ellℓ under the worst distribution in a ball, measured in the Wasserstein metric, around the empirical distribution of the samples. Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (arXiv:1505.05116v3, published in Mathematical Programming 171, 2018) showed that for piecewise concave losses the worst-case expectation is the optimal value of a finite convex program (their Theorem 4.2), which made the approach computationally practical.

Knowing the worst-case value is often not enough. Stress tests of a candidate decision require the extremal distributions themselves: the distributions inside the ball that (nearly) achieve the worst case. Section 4.2 of the paper answers this question. Its Theorem 4.4 shows that the worst case is approached by discrete distributions with at most NKNKNK atoms, read off from near-optimal solutions of a second finite convex program, and its Example 2 shows that a worst-case distribution need not exist at all. This mission formalizes that section. The source is the arXiv preprint version 3 (13 June 2017); all numbering below refers to it.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ (the paper's Rm\mathbb R^mRm), equipped with its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra. Linear functionals zzz on EEE act by ⟨z,ξ⟩\langle z,\xi\rangle⟨z,ξ⟩, and the dual norm is ∥z∥∗=sup⁡∥ξ∥≤1⟨z,ξ⟩\|z\|_* = \sup_{\|\xi\|\le 1}\langle z,\xi\rangle∥z∥∗​=sup∥ξ∥≤1​⟨z,ξ⟩. Extended reals R‾=[−∞,+∞]\overline{\mathbb R} = [-\infty,+\infty]R=[−∞,+∞] follow the paper's conventions 0⋅∞=0/0=00\cdot\infty = 0/0 = 00⋅∞=0/0=0 and ∞−∞=∞\infty - \infty = \infty∞−∞=∞.

  • Samples and empirical distribution. ξ^1,…,ξ^N\hat\xi_1,\dots,\hat\xi_Nξ^​1​,…,ξ^​N​ lie in a set Ξ⊆E\Xi\subseteq EΞ⊆E, and P^N=1N∑iδξ^i\widehat{\mathbb P}_N = \frac1N\sum_i\delta_{\hat\xi_i}PN​=N1​∑i​δξ^​i​​.
  • Wasserstein ball. dW(Q1,Q2)d_W(\mathbb Q_1,\mathbb Q_2)dW​(Q1​,Q2​) is the infimum of ∫∥ξ1−ξ2∥ Π(dξ1,dξ2)\int\|\xi_1-\xi_2\|\,\Pi(d\xi_1,d\xi_2)∫∥ξ1​−ξ2​∥Π(dξ1​,dξ2​) over couplings Π\PiΠ of Q1\mathbb Q_1Q1​ and Q2\mathbb Q_2Q2​, and Bε(P^N)\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)Bε​(PN​) is the set of probability distributions supported on Ξ\XiΞ within distance ε\varepsilonε of P^N\widehat{\mathbb P}_NPN​.
  • Loss. ℓ(ξ)=max⁡k≤Kℓk(ξ)\ell(\xi) = \max_{k\le K}\ell_k(\xi)ℓ(ξ)=maxk≤K​ℓk​(ξ) for measurable pieces ℓk:E→R‾\ell_k : E\to\overline{\mathbb R}ℓk​:E→R, and EQ[ℓ(ξ)]=EQ[max⁡{ℓ,0}]+EQ[min⁡{ℓ,0}]\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\ell(\xi)] = \mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\max\{\ell,0\}] + \mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\min\{\ell,0\}]EQ[ℓ(ξ)]=EQ[max{ℓ,0}]+EQ[min{ℓ,0}].
  • Worst-case expectation (10). sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[ℓ(ξ)]\sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\ell(\xi)]supQ∈Bε​(PN​)​EQ[ℓ(ξ)].
  • Assumption 4.1. Ξ\XiΞ is convex and closed; every −ℓk-\ell_k−ℓk​ is proper, convex and lower semicontinuous; and no ℓk\ell_kℓk​ is identically −∞-\infty−∞ on Ξ\XiΞ.
  • Program (13). Over weights αik≥0\alpha_{ik}\ge 0αik​≥0 and displacements qik∈Eq_{ik}\in Eqik​∈E,
sup⁡αik,qik 1N∑i=1N∑k=1Kαik ℓk(ξ^i−qikαik)s.t.1N∑i,k∥qik∥≤ε,  ∑kαik=1,  ξ^i−qikαik∈Ξ.\sup_{\alpha_{ik},q_{ik}}\ \frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N\sum_{k=1}^K\alpha_{ik}\,\ell_k\Big(\hat\xi_i-\frac{q_{ik}}{\alpha_{ik}}\Big)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad\frac1N\sum_{i,k}\|q_{ik}\|\le\varepsilon,\ \ \sum_k\alpha_{ik}=1,\ \ \hat\xi_i-\frac{q_{ik}}{\alpha_{ik}}\in\Xi .αik​,qik​sup​ N1​i=1∑N​k=1∑K​αik​ℓk​(ξ^​i​−αik​qik​​)s.t.N1​i,k∑​∥qik​∥≤ε,  k∑​αik​=1,  ξ^​i​−αik​qik​​∈Ξ.

When αik=0\alpha_{ik}=0αik​=0 the last constraint forces qik=0q_{ik}=0qik​=0 and the ikikik-th objective term is 000.

  • Candidate distributions. Q=1N∑i,kαik δξik\mathbb Q = \frac1N\sum_{i,k}\alpha_{ik}\,\delta_{\xi_{ik}}Q=N1​∑i,k​αik​δξik​​ with ξik=ξ^i−qik/αik\xi_{ik} = \hat\xi_i - q_{ik}/\alpha_{ik}ξik​=ξ^​i​−qik​/αik​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.4 (worst-case distributions)

Under Assumption 4.1 and for every ε≥0\varepsilon\ge 0ε≥0,

sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[ℓ(ξ)]=optimal value of (13),\sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\ell(\xi)] = \text{optimal value of (13)},Q∈Bε​(PN​)sup​EQ[ℓ(ξ)]=optimal value of (13),

and for every feasible sequence (αik(r),qik(r))r(\alpha_{ik}(r),q_{ik}(r))_r(αik​(r),qik​(r))r​ of (13) whose objective values converge to that optimal value, the distributions Qr\mathbb Q_rQr​ lie in Bε(P^N)\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)Bε​(PN​) and

sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[ℓ(ξ)]=lim⁡r→∞EQr[ℓ(ξ)]=lim⁡r→∞1N∑i,kαik(r) ℓ(ξik(r)).\sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\ell(\xi)] = \lim_{r\to\infty}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q_r}[\ell(\xi)] = \lim_{r\to\infty}\frac1N\sum_{i,k}\alpha_{ik}(r)\,\ell(\xi_{ik}(r)).Q∈Bε​(PN​)sup​EQ[ℓ(ξ)]=r→∞lim​EQr​[ℓ(ξ)]=r→∞lim​N1​i,k∑​αik​(r)ℓ(ξik​(r)).

The limits may be +∞+\infty+∞; no finiteness is assumed.

Milestones, in the order of the proof

The proof starts from (10) = (12f) (proof of Theorem 4.2, p. 13), which is posed in mission I of this series, Wasserstein Worst-Case Expectations as Finite Convex Programs, and is not restated here; it will be linked as a milestone once that mission is live.

  1. Lemma 4.5: inf⁡z⟨z,q−αξ^⟩+αf∗(z)\inf_z\langle z,q-\alpha\hat\xi\rangle+\alpha f^*(z)infz​⟨z,q−αξ^​⟩+αf∗(z) is the extended perspective of q↦−f(ξ^−q)q\mapsto -f(\hat\xi-q)q↦−f(ξ^​−q) for proper, convex, lower semicontinuous fff.
  2. (14d)–(14f): the ikikik-th dual term equals αℓk(ξ^−q/α)−χΞ(ξ^−q/α)\alpha\ell_k(\hat\xi-q/\alpha)-\chi_\Xi(\hat\xi-q/\alpha)αℓk​(ξ^​−q/α)−χΞ​(ξ^​−q/α) under the extended-arithmetic conventions.
  3. (12f) = (13), the first part of the proof of Theorem 4.4.
  4. Qr∈Bε(P^N)\mathbb Q_r\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)Qr​∈Bε​(PN​) for every feasible point of (13).
  5. EQr[ℓ(ξ)]\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q_r}[\ell(\xi)]EQr​[ℓ(ξ)] equals 1N∑i,kαikℓ(ξik)\frac1N\sum_{i,k}\alpha_{ik}\ell(\xi_{ik})N1​∑i,k​αik​ℓ(ξik​) and is at least the objective of (13) for every feasible point.

Companion results

Corollary 4.6: if Ξ\XiΞ is compact or K=1K=1K=1, the sequence has an accumulation point that defines a worst-case distribution. Example 2: for Ξ=R\Xi=\mathbb RΞ=R, N=1N=1N=1, ξ^1=0\hat\xi_1=0ξ^​1​=0, ℓ=max⁡{0,ξ−1}\ell=\max\{0,\xi-1\}ℓ=max{0,ξ−1}, the worst-case expectation is ε\varepsilonε and, for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, is attained by no distribution in the ball.

Significance

Theorem 4.4 turns the abstract supremum over an infinite-dimensional ball of distributions into a finite-dimensional convex program whose near-optimal solutions are near-worst-case distributions. The atoms ξik\xi_{ik}ξik​ sit within total weighted distance ∑i,kαik∥ξik−ξ^i∥≤Nε\sum_{i,k}\alpha_{ik}\|\xi_{ik}-\hat\xi_i\|\le N\varepsilon∑i,k​αik​∥ξik​−ξ^​i​∥≤Nε of the data, and they may lie off the data, which distinguishes Wasserstein balls from ambiguity sets based on the total variation distance or the Kullback–Leibler divergence. Example 2 marks the boundary: the theorem cannot be upgraded to the existence of a maximizer in general, while Corollary 4.6 names two cases where it can.

The results are proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. The formalization adds a precise account of the extended-arithmetic conventions the paper relies on (0⋅∞=00\cdot\infty=00⋅∞=0, q/0∉Eq/0\notin Eq/0∈/E, ∞−∞=∞\infty-\infty=\infty∞−∞=∞), each of which is made explicit in the definitions, and a reusable Lean treatment of extended-valued conjugates and perspective functions on a normed space with an arbitrary norm.

Difficulty

The first claim goes through Lagrangian duality for program (12f), whose constraints involve conjugates that may take the value +∞+\infty+∞; the strong duality and the minimax interchange (14c) must be justified for extended-valued convex functions, not just finite ones. Lemma 4.5 needs the Fenchel–Moreau theorem f∗∗=ff^{**}=ff∗∗=f for proper, convex, lower semicontinuous R‾\overline{\mathbb R}R-valued functions on a finite-dimensional normed space, together with its degenerate case α=0\alpha=0α=0. The second claim is a squeeze argument, but it rests on computing an extended expectation of an R‾\overline{\mathbb R}R-valued function under a discrete measure and on an explicit coupling for the Wasserstein distance. A tempting shortcut, attaining the supremum by a limit distribution, fails: Example 2 shows the maximizing atoms can escape to infinity.

Formalization scope

  • The space is a finite-dimensional real normed space E with [BorelSpace E]; the dual space is StrongDual ℝ E, and the dual norm is the operator norm. All values are in EReal.
  • The Wasserstein distance, the ball (6) and P^N\widehat{\mathbb P}_NPN​ are the published WassersteinDRO.Duality.wassersteinDistance, ambiguitySet (with p=1p=1p=1) and empiricalDistribution.
  • The extended expectation is the published DupacovaWets.Consistency.expect; it integrates the positive and negative parts separately and returns +∞+\infty+∞ when the positive part is infinite; there is no integrability guard, so a distribution with infinite expected loss pushes (10) to +∞+\infty+∞ as in the paper.
  • Program values are infima or suprema over feasibility predicates, so an empty feasible set gives ±∞\pm\infty±∞, never a junk 000. Program (13) encodes αik=0\alpha_{ik}=0αik​=0 by the clauses "qik=0q_{ik}=0qik​=0" and "objective term =0=0=0" (p. 14).
  • Standing assumptions carried as hypotheses: N≥1N\ge1N≥1, K≥1K\ge1K≥1, ξ^i∈Ξ\hat\xi_i\in\Xiξ^​i​∈Ξ (§2), measurability of each ℓk\ell_kℓk​ (p. 11).
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: dropping the clause αik=0⇒qik=0\alpha_{ik}=0\Rightarrow q_{ik}=0αik​=0⇒qik​=0 or the hypothesis ξ^i∈Ξ\hat\xi_i\in\Xiξ^​i​∈Ξ would change program (13) or make the ball empty, and both are kept explicitly.
  • The objects shared with mission I (extended expectation, worst-case expectation, conjugate, Assumption 4.1, program (12f)) are restated verbatim in this mission's namespace; they will be merged with mission I's copies. Contributions to the convex-analysis groundwork (extended-valued Fenchel–Moreau, perspective functions) are welcome and reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • P. Mohajerin Esfahani and D. Kuhn, Data-Driven Distributionally Robust Optimization Using the Wasserstein Metric: Performance Guarantees and Tractable Reformulations, Mathematical Programming 171, 2018. Version formalized: arXiv:1505.05116v3.
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Convex Optimization Theory, Athena Scientific, 2009 (Propositions 1.6.1 and 5.5.4, used in the proofs).
  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
  • C. Villani, Optimal Transport: Old and New, Springer, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-540-71050-9
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimal TransportOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Data-Driven Distributionally Robust Optimization Using the Wasserstein Metric: Performance Guarantees and Tractable Reformulations I: Wasserstein Worst-Case Expectations as Finite Convex ProgramsResearch Paper

Motivation

A decision maker who must minimize an expected cost EP[h(x,ξ)]\mathbb E^{\mathbb P}[h(x,\xi)]EP[h(x,ξ)] rarely knows the distribution P\mathbb PP of the uncertain parameter ξ\xiξ; usually only NNN samples ξ^1,…,ξ^N\hat\xi_1,\dots,\hat\xi_Nξ^​1​,…,ξ^​N​ are available. Replacing P\mathbb PP by the empirical distribution (sample average approximation) tends to produce decisions that perform poorly out of sample when NNN is small. Distributionally robust optimization instead minimizes the worst expected cost over a set of distributions that are plausible given the data. Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (arXiv:1505.05116v3, published in Mathematical Programming 171, 2018) take that set to be a ball in the Wasserstein metric around the empirical distribution. Such balls give finite-sample and asymptotic guarantees, but each evaluation of the robust objective is an optimization over infinitely many probability distributions. Section 4.1 of the paper shows that, for a large class of losses, this inner problem is a finite convex program. That result, Theorem 4.2, is the subject of this mission.

Timeline. Wasserstein ambiguity sets for portfolio selection were proposed by Pflug and Wozabal (2007); before this paper, robust problems over such sets were solved with global optimization algorithms (Pflug and Pichler 2014). Strong duality for conic linear and moment problems (Shapiro 2001) underlies the reduction. Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (preprint 2015, journal 2018) proved the convex reduction for piecewise concave losses; Gao and Kleywegt (arXiv:1604.02199) and Blanchet and Murthy (arXiv:1604.01446) proved strong duality for general transport costs in 2016.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ (the paper's Rm\mathbb R^mRm) and its Borel σ-algebra. Its dual norm is ∥z∥∗=sup⁡∥ξ∥≤1⟨z,ξ⟩\|z\|_* = \sup_{\|\xi\|\le 1}\langle z,\xi\rangle∥z∥∗​=sup∥ξ∥≤1​⟨z,ξ⟩, where ⟨z,ξ⟩\langle z,\xi\rangle⟨z,ξ⟩ is the value of the linear functional zzz at ξ\xiξ. Let Ξ⊆E\Xi\subseteq EΞ⊆E be the support set and ξ^1,…,ξ^N∈Ξ\hat\xi_1,\dots,\hat\xi_N\in\Xiξ^​1​,…,ξ^​N​∈Ξ the samples, with empirical distribution P^N=1N∑i=1Nδξ^i\widehat{\mathbb P}_N=\frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N\delta_{\hat\xi_i}PN​=N1​∑i=1N​δξ^​i​​.

The 1-Wasserstein distance between two distributions is the least transport cost ∫∥ξ−ξ′∥ Π(dξ,dξ′)\int\|\xi-\xi'\|\,\Pi(d\xi,d\xi')∫∥ξ−ξ′∥Π(dξ,dξ′) over all couplings Π\PiΠ with the given marginals. The Wasserstein ball Bε(P^N)\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)Bε​(PN​) is the set of probability distributions on Ξ\XiΞ within distance ε≥0\varepsilon\ge 0ε≥0 of P^N\widehat{\mathbb P}_NPN​.

The loss is a pointwise maximum ℓ(ξ)=max⁡k≤Kℓk(ξ)\ell(\xi)=\max_{k\le K}\ell_k(\xi)ℓ(ξ)=maxk≤K​ℓk​(ξ) of measurable functions ℓk:E→R‾=R∪{±∞}\ell_k:E\to\overline{\mathbb R}=\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}ℓk​:E→R=R∪{±∞}. Its expectation is EQ[ℓ]=EQ[max⁡{ℓ,0}]+EQ[min⁡{ℓ,0}]\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\ell]=\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\max\{\ell,0\}]+\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\min\{\ell,0\}]EQ[ℓ]=EQ[max{ℓ,0}]+EQ[min{ℓ,0}] with ∞−∞=∞\infty-\infty=\infty∞−∞=∞. The worst-case expectation is

sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[ℓ(ξ)].(10)\sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\widehat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[\ell(\xi)].\tag{10}Q∈Bε​(PN​)sup​EQ[ℓ(ξ)].(10)

The conjugate of f:E→R‾f:E\to\overline{\mathbb R}f:E→R is f∗(z)=sup⁡ξ⟨z,ξ⟩−f(ξ)f^*(z)=\sup_\xi\langle z,\xi\rangle-f(\xi)f∗(z)=supξ​⟨z,ξ⟩−f(ξ), the characteristic function χΞ\chi_\XiχΞ​ is 000 on Ξ\XiΞ and +∞+\infty+∞ off it, and the support function is σΞ(z)=sup⁡ξ∈Ξ⟨z,ξ⟩\sigma_\Xi(z)=\sup_{\xi\in\Xi}\langle z,\xi\rangleσΞ​(z)=supξ∈Ξ​⟨z,ξ⟩. Assumption 4.1 requires Ξ\XiΞ to be convex and closed, each −ℓk-\ell_k−ℓk​ to be proper, convex and lower semicontinuous, and no ℓk\ell_kℓk​ to be identically −∞-\infty−∞ on Ξ\XiΞ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2 (convex reduction)

Under Assumption 4.1, for every ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0, (10) equals

inf⁡λ,si,zik,νik λε+1N∑i=1Nsis.t.[−ℓk]∗(zik−νik)+σΞ(νik)−⟨zik,ξ^i⟩≤si,  ∥zik∥∗≤λ∀i,k.(11)\inf_{\lambda,s_i,z_{ik},\nu_{ik}}\ \lambda\varepsilon+\frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N s_i\quad\text{s.t.}\quad [-\ell_k]^*(z_{ik}-\nu_{ik})+\sigma_\Xi(\nu_{ik})-\langle z_{ik},\hat\xi_i\rangle\le s_i,\ \ \|z_{ik}\|_*\le\lambda\quad\forall i,k.\tag{11}λ,si​,zik​,νik​inf​ λε+N1​i=1∑N​si​s.t.[−ℓk​]∗(zik​−νik​)+σΞ​(νik​)−⟨zik​,ξ^​i​⟩≤si​,  ∥zik​∥∗​≤λ∀i,k.(11)

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. (12a)–(12c). Without any convexity, (10) is at most the value of (12c): inf⁡{λε+1N∑isi: sup⁡ξ∈Ξ(ℓ(ξ)−λ∥ξ−ξ^i∥)≤si, λ≥0}\inf\{\lambda\varepsilon+\frac1N\sum_i s_i:\ \sup_{\xi\in\Xi}(\ell(\xi)-\lambda\|\xi-\hat\xi_i\|)\le s_i,\ \lambda\ge0\}inf{λε+N1​∑i​si​: supξ∈Ξ​(ℓ(ξ)−λ∥ξ−ξ^​i​∥)≤si​, λ≥0}.
  2. Corollary 4.3. Without Assumption 4.1, (10) is at most the value of (12f), the program with constraints [−ℓk+χΞ]∗(zik)−⟨zik,ξ^i⟩≤si[-\ell_k+\chi_\Xi]^*(z_{ik})-\langle z_{ik},\hat\xi_i\rangle\le s_i[−ℓk​+χΞ​]∗(zik​)−⟨zik​,ξ^​i​⟩≤si​ and ∥zik∥∗≤λ\|z_{ik}\|_*\le\lambda∥zik​∥∗​≤λ.
  3. (12a) is an equality for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 under Assumption 4.1.
  4. The case ε=0\varepsilon=0ε=0. (10) is the sample average 1N∑iℓ(ξ^i)\frac1N\sum_i\ell(\hat\xi_i)N1​∑i​ℓ(ξ^​i​), the objective of (12b) converges to it as λ→∞\lambda\to\inftyλ→∞, and (12a) is again an equality.
  5. (12e) is an equality. For each constraint, sup⁡ξ∈Ξ(ℓk(ξ)−λ∥ξ−ξ^i∥)=min⁡∥z∥∗≤λsup⁡ξ∈Ξ(ℓk(ξ)−⟨z,ξ−ξ^i⟩)\sup_{\xi\in\Xi}(\ell_k(\xi)-\lambda\|\xi-\hat\xi_i\|)=\min_{\|z\|_*\le\lambda}\sup_{\xi\in\Xi}(\ell_k(\xi)-\langle z,\xi-\hat\xi_i\rangle)supξ∈Ξ​(ℓk​(ξ)−λ∥ξ−ξ^​i​∥)=min∥z∥∗​≤λ​supξ∈Ξ​(ℓk​(ξ)−⟨z,ξ−ξ^​i​⟩).
  6. (10) equals (12f) under Assumption 4.1.
  7. (12f) equals (11) under Assumption 4.1, as optimal values.

Significance

Theorem 4.2 is what makes Wasserstein distributionally robust optimization computable. Once the worst-case expectation is a convex program in (λ,s,z,ν)(\lambda,s,z,\nu)(λ,s,z,ν), minimizing over the decision xxx becomes one larger convex program. Section 5 of the paper derives linear and conic programs from it for piecewise affine losses, uncertainty quantification and two-stage problems. Theorem 4.4 of the same paper (mission II of this series) builds worst-case distributions from the same program. Corollary 4.3 gives a conservative convex bound for losses that are not piecewise concave.

The result is proved on paper; no machine-checked proof of it is known. A formal development needs a working theory of extended-valued conjugates, support functions and inf-convolution in a normed space, Kantorovich-type couplings of an empirical measure, and a minimax theorem over a compact dual ball. Each of these is reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The weak inequality, (10) ≤\le≤ (12f), is the elementary direction: integrate a pointwise bound against a near-optimal coupling. The difficulty lies in the two equalities. Equality in (12a) is strong duality for an infinite-dimensional moment problem whose loss may take the values ±∞\pm\infty±∞ and may be unbounded on an unbounded Ξ\XiΞ. A Slater point exists only for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, so ε=0\varepsilon=0ε=0 needs a separate limit argument. The equality (12f) === (11) is subtle as well. The conjugate of −ℓk+χΞ-\ell_k+\chi_\Xi−ℓk​+χΞ​ is only the closure of the inf-convolution of [−ℓk]∗[-\ell_k]^*[−ℓk​]∗ and σΞ\sigma_\XiσΞ​, so the two constraint sets differ and only the optimal values agree. The paper's sentence "cl[f]≤0[f]\le 0[f]≤0 iff f≤0f\le0f≤0" is false pointwise and cannot be formalized as written.

Formalization scope

  • Space. EEE is a finite-dimensional real normed space with its Borel σ-algebra. The pairing ⟨z,ξ⟩\langle z,\xi\rangle⟨z,ξ⟩ is application of a continuous linear functional zzz, and ∥z∥∗\|z\|_*∥z∥∗​ is the operator norm. These choices keep the paper's arbitrary norm; §5 of the paper uses the 1- and ∞-norms.
  • Extended reals. Values are in EReal. Mathlib's EReal has ⊤+⊥=⊥\top+\bot=\bot⊤+⊥=⊥, whereas the paper has ∞−∞=∞\infty-\infty=\infty∞−∞=∞, so the expectation treats an infinite positive part separately, and [−ℓk+χΞ]∗(z)[-\ell_k+\chi_\Xi]^*(z)[−ℓk​+χΞ​]∗(z) is written as sup⁡ξ∈Ξ(⟨z,ξ⟩+ℓk(ξ))\sup_{\xi\in\Xi}(\langle z,\xi\rangle+\ell_k(\xi))supξ∈Ξ​(⟨z,ξ⟩+ℓk​(ξ)), with no addition at all. The one EReal sum, [−ℓk]∗+σΞ[-\ell_k]^*+\sigma_\Xi[−ℓk​]∗+σΞ​ in (11), never meets ⊤+⊥\top+\bot⊤+⊥ under Assumption 4.1.
  • Programs. Each optimal value is an infimum over a feasibility predicate with real epigraph variables, so an infeasible program has value +∞+\infty+∞.
  • Ball. The ball is the published WassersteinDRO.Duality.ambiguitySet with p=1p=1p=1 around empiricalDistribution. Its condition Q(Ξc)=0\mathbb Q(\Xi^{\mathrm c})=0Q(Ξc)=0 encodes Q∈M(Ξ)\mathbb Q\in\mathcal M(\Xi)Q∈M(Ξ). The finite first moment is automatic at finite distance from P^N\widehat{\mathbb P}_NPN​.
  • Standing assumptions. Every statement carries N≥1N\ge1N≥1, K≥1K\ge1K≥1, ξ^i∈Ξ\hat\xi_i\in\Xiξ^​i​∈Ξ (§2, p. 5) and measurability of each ℓk\ell_kℓk​ (p. 11). The radius condition is ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0, or ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 in milestone 3.
  • Assumption 4.1. Convexity of −ℓk-\ell_k−ℓk​ is stated through its real epigraph, because ConvexOn cannot take an EReal codomain.
  • Not trivializable. The statements cannot be made vacuous by an empty ball, because the samples lie in Ξ\XiΞ. They cannot be trivialized by a junk expectation either: the expectation is not guarded by integrability, so a distribution with infinite expected loss makes (10) infinite, exactly as in the paper.

Welcome contributions are reusable lemmas on EReal-valued conjugates and support functions, the decomposition of a coupling with an empirical marginal into conditional distributions, the dual-norm identity max⁡∥z∥∗≤λ⟨z,v⟩=λ∥v∥\max_{\|z\|_*\le\lambda}\langle z,v\rangle=\lambda\|v\|max∥z∥∗​≤λ​⟨z,v⟩=λ∥v∥, and a Sion-type minimax theorem.

Selected references

  • P. Mohajerin Esfahani, D. Kuhn, Data-driven distributionally robust optimization using the Wasserstein metric: performance guarantees and tractable reformulations, arXiv:1505.05116v3, 2017; Math. Program. 171 (2018) 115–166. https://arxiv.org/abs/1505.05116v3
  • A. Shapiro, On duality theory of conic linear problems, in M. A. Goberna, M. A. López (eds.), Semi-Infinite Programming, Kluwer, 2001.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 2010 (Theorem 11.23(a), p. 493).
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Convex Optimization Theory, Athena Scientific, 2009 (Proposition 5.5.4).
  • G. Ch. Pflug, A. Pichler, Multistage Stochastic Optimization, Springer, 2014.
  • G. Ch. Pflug, D. Wozabal, Ambiguity in portfolio selection, Quantitative Finance 7 (2007) 435–442.
  • R. Gao, A. J. Kleywegt, Distributionally robust stochastic optimization with Wasserstein distance, arXiv:1604.02199, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1604.02199
  • J. Blanchet, K. Murthy, Quantifying distributional model risk via optimal transport, arXiv:1604.01446, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1604.01446
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convergence Analysis of a Proximal-Like Minimization Algorithm Using Bregman Functions: PMD Attains f(xⁿ) − f(u) ≤ σₙ⁻¹D_ψ(u, x⁰) and Its Iterates Converge to a MinimizerResearch Paper

Motivation

Convex minimization often has a simple objective but no useful closed form for its minimizer. A proximal method replaces one difficult minimization by a sequence of regularized minimizations. The familiar quadratic regularizer treats all directions through a Euclidean norm. In applications with nonnegative variables, entropy-like geometry can be more natural: a step can be penalized by a Bregman distance generated by a strictly convex function. Chen and Teboulle studied a proximal minimization algorithm with this geometry and established a rate in objective values together with convergence of the iterates under the paper's assumptions. Their analysis also removed a bounded-below assumption used in an earlier treatment and allowed step sizes whose sum diverges even if individual steps approach zero (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, pp. 539–540).

This mission records the complete theorem of that paper, rather than only its rate when a minimizer is known to exist. The distinction matters because a proper convex objective can have an infimum of −∞-\infty−∞ or a finite infimum that it never attains. The rate against each comparison point remains meaningful in those cases, and the theorem's value convergence does not presuppose a minimizer.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real normed space, C⊆EC\subseteq EC⊆E the nonempty effective domain of a proper lower semicontinuous convex objective, and f:C→Rf:C\to\mathbb Rf:C→R its finite restriction. Its value outside CCC is +∞+\infty+∞. Thus f∗=inf⁡u∈Cf(u)f_* = \inf_{u\in C}f(u)f∗​=infu∈C​f(u) is an extended-real number that may equal −∞-\infty−∞, and X∗={u∈C:f(u)≤f(v) for every v∈C}X_* = \{u\in C: f(u)\le f(v)\text{ for every }v\in C\}X∗​={u∈C:f(u)≤f(v) for every v∈C} is the set of minimizers, possibly empty.

A Bregman function with zone SSS is a function ψ\psiψ on the closure Sˉ\bar SSˉ of an open set SSS. It is continuously differentiable on SSS, strictly convex and continuous on Sˉ\bar SSˉ, and satisfies the bounded partial-level-set and two sequential conditions of Definition 2.1 (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, p. 539). Its distance-like expression is

Dψ(u,y)=ψ(u)−ψ(y)−⟨u−y,∇ψ(y)⟩,u∈Sˉ, y∈S.D_\psi(u,y)=\psi(u)-\psi(y)-\langle u-y,\nabla\psi(y)\rangle, \qquad u\in\bar S,\ y\in S.Dψ​(u,y)=ψ(u)−ψ(y)−⟨u−y,∇ψ(y)⟩,u∈Sˉ, y∈S.

It is nonnegative and zero exactly when u=yu=yu=y, but need not be symmetric or satisfy a triangle inequality. The zone contains the relative interior of CCC. Starting from x0∈Sx^0\in Sx0∈S and positive steps λk\lambda_kλk​, a PMD run selects xk∈S∩Cx^k\in S\cap Cxk∈S∩C minimizing f(u)+λk−1Dψ(u,xk−1)f(u)+\lambda_k^{-1}D_\psi(u,x^{k-1})f(u)+λk−1​Dψ​(u,xk−1) over u∈C∩Sˉu\in C\cap\bar Su∈C∩Sˉ, for k≥1k\ge1k≥1. Write σn=∑k=1nλk\sigma_n=\sum_{k=1}^n\lambda_kσn​=∑k=1n​λk​. The paper calls this proximal minimization with D-functions (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, pp. 539–540).

Formalization targets

Rate and value convergence

For every n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and every finite comparison point u∈C∩Sˉu\in C\cap\bar Su∈C∩Sˉ, the goal includes

f(xn)−f(u)≤σn−1Dψ(u,x0).f(x^n)-f(u)\le\sigma_n^{-1}D_\psi(u,x^0).f(xn)−f(u)≤σn−1​Dψ​(u,x0).

If σn→+∞\sigma_n\to+\inftyσn​→+∞, then f(xn)→f∗f(x^n)\to f_*f(xn)→f∗​ in the extended reals, including when f∗=−∞f_*=-\inftyf∗​=−∞. This is Theorem 3.4's inequality (20) and its ensuing value-convergence claim (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, p. 542).

Minimizer bound and iterate convergence

For every x∗∈X∗x^*\in X_*x∗∈X∗​, the same rate gives

f(xn)−f(x∗)≤σn−1Dψ(x∗,x0),n≥1.f(x^n)-f(x^*)\le\sigma_n^{-1}D_\psi(x^*,x^0),\qquad n\ge1.f(xn)−f(x∗)≤σn−1​Dψ​(x∗,x0),n≥1.

When X∗≠∅X_*\ne\varnothingX∗​=∅ and σn→+∞\sigma_n\to+\inftyσn​→+∞, the entire sequence xnx^nxn converges to a point of X∗X_*X∗​. The displayed bound is (21), and convergence of the iterates is the final clause of Theorem 3.4. The milestone list follows the authors' statements: the three-point identity, nonnegativity of the distance, Lemma 3.2, and the three parts of Lemma 3.3. Display (17) is an additional supporting theorem item (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, pp. 539–542).

Significance

The rate compares a PMD iterate with any admissible point, so it gives a finite-horizon certificate even before an optimal point is identified. If a minimizer exists, substituting it gives an explicit objective-gap bound. With divergent cumulative steps, the theorem identifies the limiting objective value without assuming that value is finite. Its final clause goes further: when the optimum is attained, the points themselves converge, not merely their objective values (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, p. 542).

The mathematical result was proved in 1993. The formalization task is to state and prove it in Lean with the extended objective, full Bregman-function conditions, and sequence limits visible to later developments. The three-point identity is already posed as a separate public platform theorem from a later mirror-descent treatment; this mission reuses that statement. The remaining statements here are proof obligations, not claims of completed machine-checked proofs. Their definition layer can also support analyses of other nonquadratic proximal algorithms.

Difficulty

The direct one-step minimization comparison alone does not yield the global estimate with σn\sigma_nσn​ and the exact weighted distance terms of Lemma 3.3(iii). It also does not settle convergence of the points: decreasing objective values can coexist with several cluster points. The Bregman function's bounded partial level sets and sequential conditions are needed to rule out that behavior. A further issue appears when f∗=−∞f_*=-\inftyf∗​=−∞: replacing the infimum by a real number, or assuming a minimizer to define it, removes a case that Theorem 3.4 explicitly covers. The original paper separates these issues across Lemmas 3.2–3.3 and Theorem 3.4 (Chen and Teboulle, 1993, pp. 540–542).

Formalization scope

Lean uses a finite-dimensional real normed space in place of Rn\mathbb R^nRn; none of the statements depends on a chosen Euclidean inner product. A derivative is a continuous linear functional, and its value on a vector represents the paper's gradient pairing. The Bregman distance is the already-published definition with the derivative at its second argument. The paper's ψ:Sˉ→R\psi:\bar S\to\mathbb Rψ:Sˉ→R is represented by a total function whose values outside Sˉ\bar SSˉ are unused. Strict convexity on Sˉ\bar SSˉ includes convexity of Sˉ\bar SSˉ. The last sequential condition explicitly requires its first arguments to lie in Sˉ\bar SSˉ, the domain where the paper defines DψD_\psiDψ​.

The extended objective is a nonempty convex domain CCC, a real-valued restriction fff, and an extended-real function equal to +∞+\infty+∞ off CCC. Lower semicontinuity applies to that extended function. The infimum f∗f_*f∗​ is taken in the extended reals; it cannot silently become zero when the values are unbounded below. A PMD run is a predicate on an existing sequence, recording a minimizer in S∩CS\cap CS∩C at each step. This makes explicit the existence consequence for which the paper assumes the gradient of ψ\psiψ has full range; it does not define iterates by a choice operator. Every Bregman distance differentiates at a point of SSS, where ψ\psiψ is C1C^1C1. The rate starts at n=1n=1n=1, so σn>0\sigma_n>0σn​>0 and no finite value is demanded of x0x^0x0. No lower bound on fff is imposed. Contributions proving the milestone inequalities, the extended-real value limit, the Bregman-function examples, and the compactness step for iterate convergence are within scope.

Selected references

  • Gong Chen and Marc Teboulle, Convergence analysis of a proximal-like minimization algorithm using Bregman functions, SIAM Journal on Optimization 3(3), 538–543, 1993. DOI: 10.1137/0803026.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Wait-and-Judge Scenario Optimization 1: For Convex Programs, Seeing s_N Support Constraints Gives P^N{V(x_N) > ε(s_N)} ≤ γ, the Value of the Variational Problem (10)Research Paper

Motivation

Many decision problems in control, finance and engineering must hold against an uncertain parameter δ\deltaδ whose distribution is unknown, while samples of δ\deltaδ (measurements, historical records, simulations) are available. The scenario approach replaces the uncertain constraint by the constraints of the NNN observed samples and solves the resulting convex program. The open question is then how robust its solution is: with what probability does a new, unseen δ\deltaδ violate it?

The classical answer, due to Calafiore and Campi (doi:10.1007/s10107-003-0499-y, 2005; doi:10.1109/TAC.2006.875041, 2006) and sharpened by Campi and Garatti (doi:10.1137/07069821X, 2008), is an a-priori bound: it depends only on NNN and the dimension ddd, and it is tight for the worst problems. It is conservative for the many problems whose solution is determined by far fewer than ddd samples. Campi and Garatti's wait-and-judge theorem (doi:10.1007/s10107-016-1056-9, Math. Program. 2018) replaces it by an a-posteriori certificate: after solving, count the samples that actually determine the solution and certify the solution at a level that depends on that count.

Timeline:

  • 2005–2006, Calafiore and Campi: a convex scenario program in Rd\mathbb R^dRd has at most ddd support constraints; first sample-size bounds.
  • 2008, Campi and Garatti: the exact bound PN{V(xN∗)>ϵ}≤∑i=0d−1(Ni)ϵi(1−ϵ)N−i\mathbb P^N\{V(x^*_N)>\epsilon\}\le\sum_{i=0}^{d-1}\binom Ni\epsilon^i(1-\epsilon)^{N-i}PN{V(xN∗​)>ϵ}≤∑i=0d−1​(iN​)ϵi(1−ϵ)N−i, with equality for fully-supported problems.
  • 2018, Campi and Garatti: the wait-and-judge bound, Theorem 1 below, with the 2008 bound as a corollary.

Setting

The decision variable is x∈Rdx\in\mathbb R^dx∈Rd. A problem consists of a cost vector c∈Rdc\in\mathbb R^dc∈Rd, a convex domain X⊆Rd\mathcal X\subseteq\mathbb R^dX⊆Rd, convex constraint sets Xδ⊆Rd\mathcal X_\delta\subseteq\mathbb R^dXδ​⊆Rd indexed by δ\deltaδ in a probability space (Δ,F,P)(\Delta,\mathcal F,\mathbb P)(Δ,F,P), and convex tie-break functions t1,…,tpt_1,\dots,t_pt1​,…,tp​. Given an i.i.d. sample δ(1),…,δ(N)\delta^{(1)},\dots,\delta^{(N)}δ(1),…,δ(N) with N>dN>dN>d, the scenario program is

min⁡x∈X cTxsubject tox∈⋂i=1NXδ(i).\min_{x\in\mathcal X}\ c^{\mathsf T}x\quad\text{subject to}\quad x\in\bigcap_{i=1}^N\mathcal X_{\delta^{(i)}}.x∈Xmin​ cTxsubject tox∈i=1⋂N​Xδ(i)​.

Ties are broken by minimising t1t_1t1​ among the minimisers, then t2t_2t2​, and so on; the resulting solution is xN∗x^*_NxN∗​.

  • The violation of a point is V(x)=P{δ∈Δ:x∉Xδ}V(x)=\mathbb P\{\delta\in\Delta: x\notin\mathcal X_\delta\}V(x)=P{δ∈Δ:x∈/Xδ​}.
  • A constraint is a support constraint if removing it changes the solution; sN∗s^*_NsN∗​ is their number.
  • Assumption 1: for every mmm and every sample of size mmm, the program with those mmm constraints has a unique tie-broken solution.
  • Assumption 2 (non-degeneracy): for every mmm, with probability one, keeping only the support constraints does not change the solution.

The variational problem (10) is: for a function ϵ:{0,…,d}→[0,1]\epsilon:\{0,\dots,d\}\to[0,1]ϵ:{0,…,d}→[0,1],

γ∗=inf⁡ξ∈Cd[0,1]ξ(1)s.t.1k!dkdtkξ(t)≥(Nk)tN−k 1[0,1−ϵ(k))(t),  t∈[0,1], k=0,…,d.\gamma^*=\inf_{\xi\in C^d[0,1]}\xi(1)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad\frac1{k!}\frac{\mathrm d^k}{\mathrm dt^k}\xi(t)\ge\binom Nk t^{N-k}\,\mathbf 1_{[0,1-\epsilon(k))}(t),\ \ t\in[0,1],\ k=0,\dots,d.γ∗=ξ∈Cd[0,1]inf​ξ(1)s.t.k!1​dtkdk​ξ(t)≥(kN​)tN−k1[0,1−ϵ(k))​(t),  t∈[0,1], k=0,…,d.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 10)

For every [0,1][0,1][0,1]-valued ϵ(k)\epsilon(k)ϵ(k), under Assumptions 1 and 2,

PN{V(xN∗)>ϵ(sN∗)} ≤ γ∗.\mathbb P^N\{V(x^*_N)>\epsilon(s^*_N)\}\ \le\ \gamma^*.PN{V(xN∗​)>ϵ(sN∗​)} ≤ γ∗.

The level ϵ\epsilonϵ is evaluated at the observed number of support constraints. The goal fixes no particular ϵ\epsilonϵ, which keeps it stable under any later choice of levels.

Milestones (the proof of Theorem 1, Sect. 5.1)

  1. sm∗≤ds^*_m\le dsm∗​≤d for every sample (quoted from [7]).
  2. (14): PN{V(xN∗)>ϵ(k)∧sN∗=k}=(Nk) PN{A}\mathbb P^N\{V(x^*_N)>\epsilon(k)\wedge s^*_N=k\}=\binom Nk\,\mathbb P^N\{A\}PN{V(xN∗​)>ϵ(k)∧sN∗​=k}=(kN​)PN{A}, where AAA adds "the first kkk constraints are of support".
  3. A=BA=BA=B up to a null set, where BBB concerns the program on the first kkk samples.
  4. (16): PN{A}=∫(ϵ(k),1](1−v)N−k dFk(v)\mathbb P^N\{A\}=\int_{(\epsilon(k),1]}(1-v)^{N-k}\,\mathrm dF_k(v)PN{A}=∫(ϵ(k),1]​(1−v)N−kdFk​(v), with Fk(v)=Pk{V(xk∗)≤v∧sk∗=k}F_k(v)=\mathbb P^k\{V(x^*_k)\le v\wedge s^*_k=k\}Fk​(v)=Pk{V(xk∗​)≤v∧sk∗​=k}.
  5. (17): PN{V(xN∗)>ϵ(sN∗)}=∑k=0d(Nk)∫(ϵ(k),1](1−v)N−k dFk(v)\mathbb P^N\{V(x^*_N)>\epsilon(s^*_N)\}=\sum_{k=0}^d\binom Nk\int_{(\epsilon(k),1]}(1-v)^{N-k}\,\mathrm dF_k(v)PN{V(xN∗​)>ϵ(sN∗​)}=∑k=0d​(kN​)∫(ϵ(k),1]​(1−v)N−kdFk​(v).
  6. (18): ∑k=0min⁡{m,d}(mk)∫[0,1](1−v)m−k dFk(v)=1\sum_{k=0}^{\min\{m,d\}}\binom mk\int_{[0,1]}(1-v)^{m-k}\,\mathrm dF_k(v)=1∑k=0min{m,d}​(km​)∫[0,1]​(1−v)m−kdFk​(v)=1 for every mmm.
  7. Weak duality between the truncated moment problem (20) and its dual (21), giving (22).
  8. (23): 1k!dkdtktm=(mk)tm−k\frac1{k!}\frac{\mathrm d^k}{\mathrm dt^k}t^m=\binom mk t^{m-k}k!1​dtkdk​tm=(km​)tm−k for m≥km\ge km≥k, and 000 otherwise.
  9. (24): the infimum of p(1)p(1)p(1) over polynomials feasible for (10) equals γ∗\gamma^*γ∗.

Companions

  • Theorem 2 (p. 11): for β∈(0,1)\beta\in(0,1)β∈(0,1) and ϵ(k)=1−t(k)\epsilon(k)=1-t(k)ϵ(k)=1−t(k), with t(k)t(k)t(k) the unique root in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) of βN+1∑m=kN(mk)tm−k−(Nk)tN−k=0\frac{\beta}{N+1}\sum_{m=k}^N\binom mk t^{m-k}-\binom Nk t^{N-k}=0N+1β​∑m=kN​(km​)tm−k−(kN​)tN−k=0, the probability is at most β\betaβ.
  • The root lemma of Sect. 5.3, including its sign and divergence claims.
  • γ∗≤∑i<d(Ni)ϵi(1−ϵ)N−i\gamma^*\le\sum_{i<d}\binom Ni\epsilon^i(1-\epsilon)^{N-i}γ∗≤∑i<d​(iN​)ϵi(1−ϵ)N−i for constant ϵ\epsilonϵ (Sect. 5.2).
  • Corollary 1, the 2008 bound.

Significance

Theorem 1 turns the number of support constraints, which is observed after solving, into a confidence statement that holds uniformly over all convex problems and all distributions. With Theorem 2's choice of ϵ(k)\epsilon(k)ϵ(k), a user who finds k≪dk\ll dk≪d support constraints obtains a level ϵ(k)\epsilon(k)ϵ(k) comparable to that of a kkk-dimensional problem, which is far below the a-priori level for dimension ddd. The classical bound (2) is recovered as Corollary 1, so Theorem 1 contains the earlier theory.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as is known, it has no machine-checked proof. A formalization produces:

  • a formal account of scenario programs with lexicographic tie-break and of support constraints in the "changes the solution" sense;
  • the exchangeability argument (14) on product measures;
  • the representation (17) of a tail probability through generalized distribution functions;
  • a weak-duality argument for a generalized moment problem. The 2008 bound itself is posed on the platform as an open problem under other hypotheses; Corollary 1 states it under this paper's assumptions.

Difficulty

The obvious approach bounds the probability for each value of sN∗s^*_NsN∗​ separately by a binomial tail, then sums. This fails: the event sN∗=ks^*_N=ksN∗​=k is not known in advance, and summing the individual bounds over kkk loses the uniformity that makes the result useful. The paper instead characterises every convex problem by the (d+1)(d+1)(d+1)-tuple (F0,…,Fd)(F_0,\dots,F_d)(F0​,…,Fd​). It then maximises (17) over all tuples satisfying the infinitely many moment conditions (18), which is a generalized moment problem in d+1d+1d+1 measures, and solves it by duality.

Two steps carry most of the work. One is the almost-sure identity A=BA=BA=B, which depends on the precise interplay of Assumptions 1 and 2 with the tie-break. The other is passing from the polynomial dual problems to the variational problem (10), which needs a density argument in Cd[0,1]C^d[0,1]Cd[0,1]. The bound sN∗≤ds^*_N\le dsN∗​≤d itself is quoted from the earlier literature; it needs a Helly-type argument adapted to the lexicographic tie-break.

Formalization scope

  • Spaces. The decision space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) with its Borel σ-algebra, and samples are Fin N → Δ, indexed from 000. P\mathbb PP is a probability measure and PN\mathbb P^NPN is the product measure.
  • Tie-break. The tie-broken solution is the lexicographic minimiser of (cTx,t1(x),…,tp(x))(c^{\mathsf T}x,t_1(x),\dots,t_p(x))(cTx,t1​(x),…,tp​(x)) and depends only on the feasible set, which is what makes the exchangeability step valid. A support constraint is one whose removal changes this solution; this is not the platform's earlier "removal lowers the cost" notion.
  • Assumptions. Assumption 1 is required for every sample, Assumption 2 almost surely.
  • Measurability. The paper takes measurability for granted (footnote 1). Here it is two explicit hypotheses: the relation {(x,δ):x∈Xδ}\{(x,\delta):x\in\mathcal X_\delta\}{(x,δ):x∈Xδ​} is measurable, and every solution map ω↦xm∗(ω)\omega\mapsto x^*_m(\omega)ω↦xm∗​(ω) is measurable. No event is assumed measurable directly.
  • FkF_kFk​. FkF_kFk​ is the finite measure on R\mathbb RR given by the law of V(xk∗)V(x^*_k)V(xk∗​) on the event {sk∗=k}\{s^*_k=k\}{sk∗​=k}; it is not normalised.
  • Problem (10). Cd[0,1]C^d[0,1]Cd[0,1] is ContDiffOn ℝ d on [0,1][0,1][0,1], with derivatives taken within [0,1][0,1][0,1]. γ∗\gamma^*γ∗ is a real infimum over a set that is nonempty (ξ(t)=tN\xi(t)=t^Nξ(t)=tN) and bounded below by 000.
  • Probabilities are compared with real quantities through ENNReal.ofReal.
  • Theorem 2 is stated for every ϵ\epsilonϵ whose values 1−ϵ(k)1-\epsilon(k)1−ϵ(k) are roots of (11) in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1), which by its first part is the paper's ϵ\epsilonϵ.
  • Added hypothesis. The constant-ϵ\epsilonϵ companion assumes d≥1d\ge1d≥1: at d=0d=0d=0, ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0 its inequality is false.

Ruled-out trivializations:

  • The solution is never a free function of the sample.
  • The goal does not mention FkF_kFk​, moments or polynomials.
  • Assumption 1 is not weakened to almost surely.
  • N>dN>dN>d is kept on Theorems 1, 2 and Corollary 1.
  • The indicators keep the paper's open and closed ends: [0,1−ϵ(k))[0,1-\epsilon(k))[0,1−ϵ(k)) in (10), (ϵ(k),1](\epsilon(k),1](ϵ(k),1] in (16)–(21).

Contributions welcome:

  • the support-constraint bound under lexicographic tie-break, which is reusable for any convex scenario result;
  • the exchangeability lemma on Measure.pi;
  • the duality and density lemmas, which are pure analysis.

Selected references

  • M. C. Campi, S. Garatti, Wait-and-judge scenario optimization, Mathematical Programming 167 (2018). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-1056-9
  • G. C. Calafiore, M. C. Campi, Uncertain convex programs: randomized solutions and confidence levels, Mathematical Programming 102 (2005). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-003-0499-y
  • G. C. Calafiore, M. C. Campi, The scenario approach to robust control design, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 51 (2006). https://doi.org/10.1109/TAC.2006.875041
  • M. C. Campi, S. Garatti, The exact feasibility of randomized solutions of uncertain convex programs, SIAM Journal on Optimization 19 (2008). https://doi.org/10.1137/07069821X
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraMachine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Adaptive Subgradient Methods for Online Learning and Stochastic Optimization 2: Full-Matrix AdaGrad's Regret Is Bounded by tr(G_T^{1/2})Research Paper

Motivation

Online convex optimization is the standard model for learning from a stream of data: in round ttt a learner commits to a point xtx_txt​ in a convex set X⊆Rd\mathcal X\subseteq\mathbb R^dX⊆Rd, a convex loss ftf_tft​ is revealed, and the learner pays ft(xt)+φ(xt)f_t(x_t)+\varphi(x_t)ft​(xt​)+φ(xt​), where φ\varphiφ is a fixed regularizer. Subgradient methods for this model use one fixed geometry (usually the Euclidean one) for every coordinate and every direction, regardless of the data. Duchi, Hazan and Singer (JMLR 12 (2011) 2121–2159) introduced ADAGRAD, which adapts the geometry to the observed subgradients. The diagonal version is one of the most widely used optimizers in machine learning and the ancestor of RMSProp and Adam. This mission formalizes the paper's full-matrix version: the proximal term is built from the matrix square root of the accumulated outer products of the subgradients, so the method adapts to correlated directions, not only to individual coordinates.

The analysis extends the regret bounds of primal-dual subgradient methods and regularized dual averaging (Nesterov 2009; Xiao 2010) and of composite mirror descent to proximal functions that change over time, and combines them with trace inequalities for the matrix square root. Concurrent work by McMahan and Streeter (COLT 2010) studied closely related adaptive proximal methods.

Setting

Vectors live in Rd\mathbb R^dRd with the Euclidean inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​. In round t=1,2,…t=1,2,\dotst=1,2,… the learner plays xt∈Xx_t\in\mathcal Xxt​∈X and observes a subgradient gt∈∂ft(xt)g_t\in\partial f_t(x_t)gt​∈∂ft​(xt​), that is, ft(y)≥ft(xt)+⟨gt,y−xt⟩f_t(y)\ge f_t(x_t)+\langle g_t,y-x_t\rangleft​(y)≥ft​(xt​)+⟨gt​,y−xt​⟩ for all yyy. The regret against a comparator x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X is

Rϕ(T)=∑t=1T[ft(xt)+φ(xt)−ft(x∗)−φ(x∗)].R_\phi(T)=\sum_{t=1}^T\big[f_t(x_t)+\varphi(x_t)-f_t(x^*)-\varphi(x^*)\big].Rϕ​(T)=t=1∑T​[ft​(xt​)+φ(xt​)−ft​(x∗)−φ(x∗)].

The outer product matrix is Gt=∑τ=1tgτgτ⊤G_t=\sum_{\tau=1}^t g_\tau g_\tau^\topGt​=∑τ=1t​gτ​gτ⊤​, a symmetric positive semidefinite d×dd\times dd×d matrix, and St=Gt1/2S_t=G_t^{1/2}St​=Gt1/2​ is its positive semidefinite square root. With parameters η>0\eta>0η>0 and δ≥0\delta\ge0δ≥0, ADAGRAD with full matrices (Figure 2 of the paper) sets

Ht=δI+St,ψt(x)=12⟨x,Htx⟩,Bψt(x,y)=12⟨x−y,Ht(x−y)⟩,H_t=\delta I+S_t,\qquad \psi_t(x)=\tfrac12\langle x,H_tx\rangle,\qquad B_{\psi_t}(x,y)=\tfrac12\langle x-y,H_t(x-y)\rangle,Ht​=δI+St​,ψt​(x)=21​⟨x,Ht​x⟩,Bψt​​(x,y)=21​⟨x−y,Ht​(x−y)⟩,

starts at x1=0x_1=0x1​=0, and computes xt+1x_{t+1}xt+1​ by one of two updates:

  • the primal-dual subgradient update (3): xt+1∈argmin⁡x∈X{η⟨1t∑τ≤tgτ,x⟩+ηφ(x)+1tψt(x)}x_{t+1}\in\operatorname{argmin}_{x\in\mathcal X}\{\eta\langle\tfrac1t\sum_{\tau\le t}g_\tau,x\rangle+\eta\varphi(x)+\tfrac1t\psi_t(x)\}xt+1​∈argminx∈X​{η⟨t1​∑τ≤t​gτ​,x⟩+ηφ(x)+t1​ψt​(x)};
  • the composite mirror descent update (4): xt+1∈argmin⁡x∈X{η⟨gt,x⟩+ηφ(x)+Bψt(x,xt)}x_{t+1}\in\operatorname{argmin}_{x\in\mathcal X}\{\eta\langle g_t,x\rangle+\eta\varphi(x)+B_{\psi_t}(x,x_t)\}xt+1​∈argminx∈X​{η⟨gt​,x⟩+ηφ(x)+Bψt​​(x,xt​)}.

The dual (semi)norm of ψt\psi_tψt​ is ∥v∥ψt∗2=⟨v,Ht†v⟩\|v\|_{\psi_t^*}^2=\langle v,H_t^\dagger v\rangle∥v∥ψt∗​2​=⟨v,Ht†​v⟩, where A†A^\daggerA† is the pseudo-inverse.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7

Assume X\mathcal XX closed and convex, ftf_tft​ and φ\varphiφ convex, and φ\varphiφ minimized over X\mathcal XX at x1=0x_1=0x1​=0. For the primal-dual update with δ≥max⁡t≤T∥gt∥2\delta\ge\max_{t\le T}\|g_t\|_2δ≥maxt≤T​∥gt​∥2​, every x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X satisfies

Rϕ(T)≤δη∥x∗∥22+1η∥x∗∥22tr⁡(GT1/2)+ηtr⁡(GT1/2),R_\phi(T)\le\frac\delta\eta\|x^*\|_2^2+\frac1\eta\|x^*\|_2^2\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2})+\eta\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2}),Rϕ​(T)≤ηδ​∥x∗∥22​+η1​∥x∗∥22​tr(GT1/2​)+ηtr(GT1/2​),

and for the composite mirror descent update with any δ≥0\delta\ge0δ≥0,

Rϕ(T)≤δη∥x∗∥22+12ηmax⁡t≤T∥x∗−xt∥22tr⁡(GT1/2)+ηtr⁡(GT1/2).R_\phi(T)\le\frac\delta\eta\|x^*\|_2^2+\frac1{2\eta}\max_{t\le T}\|x^*-x_t\|_2^2\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2})+\eta\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2}).Rϕ​(T)≤ηδ​∥x∗∥22​+2η1​t≤Tmax​∥x∗−xt​∥22​tr(GT1/2​)+ηtr(GT1/2​).

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  1. Lemma 16 and Propositions 3 and 2: regret bounds for mirror descent and dual averaging with time-varying quadratic proximal functions ψt(x)=12⟨x,Htx⟩\psi_t(x)=\tfrac12\langle x,H_tx\rangleψt​(x)=21​⟨x,Ht​x⟩ ((11) and (10)).
  2. Lemma 13: A⪰B⪰0A\succeq B\succeq0A⪰B⪰0 implies A1/2⪰B1/2A^{1/2}\succeq B^{1/2}A1/2⪰B1/2.
  3. The first display of the proof of Theorem 7 and inequality (16): the growth of the Bregman terms is controlled by tr⁡(Gt1/2)\operatorname{tr}(G_t^{1/2})tr(Gt1/2​).
  4. Lemma 14 (∇Xtr⁡(Xp)=pXp−1\nabla_X\operatorname{tr}(X^p)=pX^{p-1}∇X​tr(Xp)=pXp−1), Lemma 8 (a first-order concavity inequality for tr⁡(B1/2)\operatorname{tr}(B^{1/2})tr(B1/2) at singular BBB), Lemma 9, and Lemma 10, the doubling lemma
∑t=1T⟨gt,St†gt⟩≤2∑t=1T⟨gt,ST†gt⟩=2tr⁡(GT1/2).\sum_{t=1}^T\langle g_t,S_t^\dagger g_t\rangle\le2\sum_{t=1}^T\langle g_t,S_T^\dagger g_t\rangle=2\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2}).t=1∑T​⟨gt​,St†​gt​⟩≤2t=1∑T​⟨gt​,ST†​gt​⟩=2tr(GT1/2​).
  1. (17): the dual-norm sums of both updates are at most 2tr⁡(GT1/2)2\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2})2tr(GT1/2​).

Significance

The quantity tr⁡(GT1/2)\operatorname{tr}(G_T^{1/2})tr(GT1/2​) can be much smaller than the Tmax⁡t∥gt∥2\sqrt{T}\max_t\|g_t\|_2T​maxt​∥gt​∥2​ factor in the regret of non-adaptive online gradient descent with a tuned step size: it is small when the subgradients concentrate in a few directions, possibly not aligned with the coordinate axes. The paper's Corollary 11 rewrites it as d\sqrt dd​ times the square root of inf⁡{∑tgt⊤S−1gt:S⪰0,tr⁡(S)≤d}\inf\{\sum_t g_t^\top S^{-1}g_t: S\succeq0,\operatorname{tr}(S)\le d\}inf{∑t​gt⊤​S−1gt​:S⪰0,tr(S)≤d}, the gradient term of the best fixed full-matrix proximal function chosen in hindsight. The supporting results have their own uses. Propositions 2 and 3 are the generic regret bounds for adaptive proximal methods. Lemmas 8–10 are trace inequalities for the matrix square root that appear throughout the analysis of second-order online methods.

The results are proved in the paper. To our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. Formalizing them requires the matrix functional calculus (square roots, pseudo-inverses, real powers) in a form usable for inequalities, which Mathlib has only partly: for instance, monotonicity of the square root is in Mathlib for C*-algebras, which covers complex but not real matrices. A complete development gives a verified regret bound for an adaptive full-matrix method together with these matrix inequalities.

Difficulty

The online-learning half (Lemma 16, Propositions 2 and 3) is a convex-analysis argument once the proximal functions are quadratic. The obstacle is the matrix half. The natural approach to Lemma 10 is induction with a scalar inequality b−a≤b−a/(2b)\sqrt{b-a}\le\sqrt b-a/(2\sqrt b)b−a​≤b​−a/(2b​) applied eigenvalue by eigenvalue. This fails because GT−1G_{T-1}GT−1​ and GTG_TGT​ do not commute, so their eigenvectors differ. One needs the concavity of A↦tr⁡(A1/2)A\mapsto\operatorname{tr}(A^{1/2})A↦tr(A1/2) on positive semidefinite matrices and its gradient, at points where AAA may be singular. That is where Lemma 8 and the pseudo-inverse enter: the inverse root does not exist, and a limit δ↓0\delta\downarrow0δ↓0 is needed. The same issue arises in Lemma 9 and in the dual norm when δ=0\delta=0δ=0.

Formalization scope

Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), so ‖·‖ is the Euclidean norm. Matrices are Matrix (Fin d) (Fin d) ℝ, acting on vectors through Matrix.toEuclideanLin. The square root is Mathlib's CFC.sqrt under the Loewner order (MatrixOrder). The pseudo-inverse is the functional calculus of λ↦λ−1\lambda\mapsto\lambda^{-1}λ↦λ−1 with 0−1=00^{-1}=00−1=0, and B−1/2B^{-1/2}B−1/2 is written as (B†)1/2(B^\dagger)^{1/2}(B†)1/2. Mathlib's matrix inverse is used only where the matrix is invertible or the vector is zero. Rounds are 1-based and G0=0G_0=0G0​=0. The losses and φ\varphiφ are real-valued convex functions, and the constraint is carried by X\mathcal XX. Each update's argmin is a predicate (the next iterate lies in X\mathcal XX and minimizes the objective there), which does not assert existence or uniqueness. A run consists of the TTT rounds of Figure 2, with the subgradient relation imposed in every round. The subgradient relation is the platform's published ShorNonsmooth.AlmostDiff.IsSubgradient.

Restrictions and conventions, each stated in the item that needs it:

  • φ\varphiφ is minimized over X\mathcal XX at x1=0x_1=0x1​=0. This is the paper's x1=arg⁡min⁡Xφx_1=\arg\min_{\mathcal X}\varphix1​=argminX​φ. Without it both parts of Theorem 7 are false.
  • Lemma 8 assumes ν≥0\nu\ge0ν≥0. The page says "for any ν\nuν", but the inequality fails for ν<0\nu<0ν<0 (for B=0B=0B=0, ν=−1\nu=-1ν=−1 it reads 2∥g∥2≤02\|g\|_2\le02∥g∥2​≤0). The paper only applies the lemma with ν=1\nu=1ν=1.
  • Lemma 16 and Propositions 2, 3 are specialised to quadratic proximal functions. In Lemma 16 and Proposition 3, HtH_tHt​ is positive semidefinite and gtg_tgt​ lies in its range, so the dual norm is finite. In Proposition 2, HtH_tHt​ is positive definite, the HtH_tHt​ increase, and x1=0x_1=0x1​=0. Lemma 16 asks for x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X. Proposition 3 is stated for T≥1T\ge1T≥1 rounds.
  • H0=δIH_0=\delta IH0​=δI in the dual norm ∥⋅∥ψ0∗\|\cdot\|_{\psi_0^*}∥⋅∥ψ0∗​​ of (17) and Theorem 7. Figure 2's H0=0H_0=0H0​=0 is never used by the updates.
  • Lemma 14's gradient is stated as a directional derivative along every symmetric direction.

A formalization in which the next iterate need not lie in X\mathcal XX, the comparator ranges outside X\mathcal XX, StS_tSt​ is GtG_tGt​ itself or its entrywise square root, or St†S_t^\daggerSt†​ is Mathlib's matrix inverse (which vanishes on singular matrices), states a different theorem and is excluded.

Proofs need the convex-analysis optimality conditions for the two updates, the Loewner-order calculus of CFC.sqrt on real matrices (Lemma 13), concavity and differentiability of tr⁡(A1/2)\operatorname{tr}(A^{1/2})tr(A1/2), and limits δ↓0\delta\downarrow0δ↓0 in the functional calculus. The matrix lemmas (13, 14, 8, 9, 10) are reusable outside this paper. Alternative proofs, for instance of Lemma 10 through operator concavity, are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Duchi, E. Hazan, Y. Singer, Adaptive Subgradient Methods for Online Learning and Stochastic Optimization, Journal of Machine Learning Research 12 (2011) 2121–2159. https://jmlr.org/papers/v12/duchi11a.html
  • H. B. McMahan, M. Streeter, Adaptive Bound Optimization for Online Convex Optimization, COLT 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/1002.4908
  • L. Xiao, Dual Averaging Methods for Regularized Stochastic Learning and Online Optimization, Journal of Machine Learning Research 11 (2010) 2543–2596. https://jmlr.org/papers/v11/xiao10a.html
  • Y. Nesterov, Primal-dual subgradient methods for convex problems, Mathematical Programming 120 (2009) 221–259. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-007-0149-x
  • T. Ando, Concavity of certain maps on positive definite matrices and applications to Hadamard products, Linear Algebra and its Applications 26 (1979) 203–241. https://doi.org/10.1016/0024-3795(79)90179-4
16 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Numerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers III: Parallel Projections — the Dual Average Vanishes and ADMM Reduces to Project-and-AverageTextbook

Motivation

Many feasibility problems ask for a point satisfying several constraints at once. When each constraint set admits a manageable Euclidean projection, a parallel method can project onto all sets independently and combine the results. Chapter 5 of Boyd, Parikh, Chu, Peleato and Eckstein (2011) places this construction inside the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM). That connection matters when a single projection onto the intersection is difficult but projections onto its individual factors are available.

The chapter first rewrites constrained convex optimization as a split problem. It then treats feasibility for two sets and finally an arbitrary finite collection of sets. For the latter, the product of the sets captures the separate constraints, while a consensus set forces all copies of the variable to agree. These are ordinary finite dimensional convex sets, so the account applies to geometric feasibility and to constrained optimization subproblems in which projection is the computational primitive. The mission isolates the identities that let the product-space algorithm run through parallel individual projections and one average.

Setting

A Euclidean projection of a vector vvv onto a set CCC is a point p∈Cp\in Cp∈C closest to vvv in Euclidean distance. Each set Ai⊆Rn\mathcal A_i\subseteq\mathbb R^nAi​⊆Rn, for i=1,…,Ni=1,\ldots,Ni=1,…,N, is assumed nonempty, closed and convex, and N≥1N\ge1N≥1. These properties give a unique projection for every input. They do not require the common intersection ⋂iAi\bigcap_i\mathcal A_i⋂i​Ai​ to be nonempty: the iteration and the algebraic identities still make sense when the feasibility problem has no solution.

A block vector x=(x1,…,xN)x=(x_1,\ldots,x_N)x=(x1​,…,xN​) belongs to the product set C=A1×⋯×AN\mathcal C=\mathcal A_1\times\cdots\times\mathcal A_NC=A1​×⋯×AN​ exactly when xi∈Aix_i\in\mathcal A_ixi​∈Ai​ for all iii. The consensus set D\mathcal DD consists of constant block vectors (z,…,z)(z,\ldots,z)(z,…,z). The block average is xˉ=N−1∑ixi\bar x=N^{-1}\sum_i x_ixˉ=N−1∑i​xi​. Distances in the stacked space use the ordinary Euclidean metric, whose square is ∑i∥xi−yi∥22\sum_i\|x_i-y_i\|_2^2∑i​∥xi​−yi​∥22​. A block vector need not carry a function-space norm in the formalization for this metric to be stated precisely.

Starting with arbitrary z0∈Rnz^0\in\mathbb R^nz0∈Rn and u0=(ui0)u^0=(u_i^0)u0=(ui0​), the parallel projection ADMM run has three updates: each xik+1x_i^{k+1}xik+1​ is the projection of zk−uikz^k-u_i^kzk−uik​ onto Ai\mathcal A_iAi​; zk+1z^{k+1}zk+1 is the average of xik+1+uikx_i^{k+1}+u_i^kxik+1​+uik​; and uik+1=uik+xik+1−zk+1u_i^{k+1}=u_i^k+x_i^{k+1}-z^{k+1}uik+1​=uik​+xik+1​−zk+1. The uiku_i^kuik​ are scaled dual variables, formed using a penalty parameter ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0. The source presents these equations as the specialization of scaled ADMM for the indicator functions of C\mathcal CC and D\mathcal DD §5.1.2, pp. 35–36.

Formalization targets

The first targets identify the projections that make the iteration parallel:

ΠC(x)=(ΠA1(x1),…,ΠAN(xN)),ΠD(x)=(xˉ,…,xˉ).\Pi_{\mathcal C}(x)=(\Pi_{\mathcal A_1}(x_1),\ldots,\Pi_{\mathcal A_N}(x_N)),\qquad \Pi_{\mathcal D}(x)=(\bar x,\ldots,\bar x).ΠC​(x)=(ΠA1​​(x1​),…,ΠAN​​(xN​)),ΠD​(x)=(xˉ,…,xˉ).

The goal is the full reduction of a run. Its dual average is zero after every update, and its common vector equals the primal average from the following update onward:

uˉk+1=0(k≥0),zk+1=xˉk+1(k≥1).\bar u^{k+1}=0\quad(k\ge0),\qquad z^{k+1}=\bar x^{k+1}\quad(k\ge1).uˉk+1=0(k≥0),zk+1=xˉk+1(k≥1).

Consequently, for every k≥2k\ge2k≥2 and every iii, the same iterates obey the simpler two-line algorithm

xik+1=ΠAi(xˉk−uik),uik+1=uik+xik+1−xˉk+1.x_i^{k+1}=\Pi_{\mathcal A_i}(\bar x^k-u_i^k),\qquad u_i^{k+1}=u_i^k+x_i^{k+1}-\bar x^{k+1}.xik+1​=ΠAi​​(xˉk−uik​),uik+1​=uik​+xik+1​−xˉk+1.

If uˉ0=0\bar u^0=0uˉ0=0, those last identities hold already for k≥1k\ge1k≥1. The index qualification is necessary because z0z^0z0 is arbitrary, and z1z^1z1 still contains the initial dual average unless that average was zero. This is the precise reading of the source's “after the first step” statement §5.1.2, p. 36. The milestone list also records the indicator-function projection update on p. 33 and the averaged identities on p. 36.

Significance

The result identifies what information must pass between the parallel projection steps: each local step needs the shared average and its own dual displacement. It also fixes the relationship between the displayed three-variable ADMM iteration and the shorter project-and-average rule. Without the dual-average identity, replacing zkz^kzk by xˉk\bar x^kxˉk is not justified at the initial indices. The product and consensus projection identities explain why the update can be decomposed into independent local projections followed by a mean §5.1.2, p. 35.

The chapter's identities are known mathematical results; this mission asks for machine-checked proofs of their stated finite dimensional version. A completed development supplies reusable statements about nearest-point projection onto products and diagonal sets, and a precise run predicate for later analysis of parallel ADMM. The goal is a statement about every valid run rather than a claim of convergence or existence of a feasible common point. Neither convergence nor feasibility of the intersection is concluded on these pages. Those distinctions keep the mission aligned with the actual scope of Chapter 5.

Difficulty

The product projection uses a sum of squared component distances. Treating a block vector as an arbitrary function and applying its default norm would change the metric, so a projection theorem stated that way would describe a different algorithm. The consensus projection likewise depends on the Euclidean sum and the finite average, including the condition N≥1N\ge1N≥1. The run reduction has a separate indexing difficulty: the vanishing average follows after one dual update, but the first simplified projection step can occur later because it uses the previous common vector. An argument that silently assumes z0=xˉ0z^0=\bar x^0z0=xˉ0 would erase the arbitrary initialization on the source page.

Formalization scope

Lean represents each Rn\mathbb R^nRn as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and the NNN blocks as a function on Fin N; the latter is the source's 111-based indexing shifted to 000-based indices. Squared stacked distance is defined as the sum of squared component norms. The average uses the real factor 1/N1/N1/N only under 0<N0<N0<N. Individual projections reuse the published nearest-point relation RandomGradFree.Nonsmooth.IsMetricProjection. A run records the three updates as conditions on sequences, with arbitrary z0,u0z^0,u^0z0,u0 and unused x0x^0x0. The source's scaled dual variable uuu appears directly; ρ\rhoρ cancels from these projection updates once it is positive.

The source assumes closed convex sets; nonemptiness is stated explicitly here because a projection onto an empty set does not exist. The book prints −zk-z^k−zk in its averaged dual update on p. 36, while its defining update on p. 35 and the next line on p. 36 require −zk+1-z^{k+1}−zk+1. The formal statement uses the corrected index. The book also calls the individual sets Ci\mathcal C_iCi​ in its closing sentence; the sets defined for this subsection are Ai\mathcal A_iAi​. The milestone quote preserves the printed intermediate index. The goal includes the simplified primal and dual updates, since asserting only that the dual average vanishes would omit the chapter's advertised reduction.

The development needs finite sums in Euclidean spaces, convex-set projection, and elementary properties of product and diagonal sets. Product and consensus projection results are useful beyond ADMM. Contributions proving the four milestones, the full run theorem, or equivalent projection lemmas at the same generality are within scope.

Selected references

  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato and J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1), 2011, pp. 1–122. DOI: 10.1561/2200000016.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers I: Under a Lagrangian Saddle Point, ADMM Residuals Vanish and Objective Values ConvergeTextbook

Why ADMM convergence matters

The alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) is one of the most widely used algorithms for large-scale convex optimization in statistics, machine learning and signal processing. Its appeal is decomposition: a problem whose objective splits into two parts, coupled only by a linear constraint, is solved by alternately minimizing over each part and updating a dual variable. Each subproblem is often a proximity operator, a projection or a small linear system, so ADMM turns problems such as the lasso, sparse inverse covariance selection and consensus fitting across many machines into sequences of simple steps. The survey of Boyd, Parikh, Chu, Peleato and Eckstein (DOI 10.1561/2200000016) made the method standard, and every algorithm in its later chapters is justified by one convergence result, stated in §3.2.1 and proved in Appendix A. This mission formalizes that result and the inequalities behind it.

The method goes back to Gabay and Mercier (1976). Eckstein and Bertsekas (1992) proved convergence through the theory of maximal monotone operators, by identifying ADMM with Douglas–Rachford splitting applied to the dual problem. The proof in Appendix A of the survey is different: it is a direct Lyapunov argument in finite dimensions that uses only convexity and elementary algebra.

Setting

Let f:Rn→R∪{+∞}f:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}f:Rn→R∪{+∞} and g:Rm→R∪{+∞}g:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}g:Rm→R∪{+∞}, let A∈Rp×nA\in\mathbb R^{p\times n}A∈Rp×n, B∈Rp×mB\in\mathbb R^{p\times m}B∈Rp×m and c∈Rpc\in\mathbb R^pc∈Rp. The problem is

minimize f(x)+g(z)subject to Ax+Bz=c,(3.1)\text{minimize } f(x)+g(z)\quad\text{subject to } Ax+Bz=c, \tag{3.1}minimize f(x)+g(z)subject to Ax+Bz=c,(3.1)

with optimal value p⋆=inf⁡{f(x)+g(z)∣Ax+Bz=c}p^\star=\inf\{f(x)+g(z)\mid Ax+Bz=c\}p⋆=inf{f(x)+g(z)∣Ax+Bz=c}. The augmented Lagrangian with parameter ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0 is

Lρ(x,z,y)=f(x)+g(z)+yT(Ax+Bz−c)+ρ2∥Ax+Bz−c∥22,L_\rho(x,z,y)=f(x)+g(z)+y^T(Ax+Bz-c)+\tfrac{\rho}{2}\|Ax+Bz-c\|_2^2,Lρ​(x,z,y)=f(x)+g(z)+yT(Ax+Bz−c)+2ρ​∥Ax+Bz−c∥22​,

and L0L_0L0​ is the ordinary Lagrangian. For ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, ADMM generates iterates by

xk+1∈argmin⁡xLρ(x,zk,yk),zk+1∈argmin⁡zLρ(xk+1,z,yk),yk+1=yk+ρ(Axk+1+Bzk+1−c).x^{k+1}\in\operatorname*{argmin}_x L_\rho(x,z^k,y^k),\quad z^{k+1}\in\operatorname*{argmin}_z L_\rho(x^{k+1},z,y^k),\quad y^{k+1}=y^k+\rho(Ax^{k+1}+Bz^{k+1}-c).xk+1∈xargmin​Lρ​(x,zk,yk),zk+1∈zargmin​Lρ​(xk+1,z,yk),yk+1=yk+ρ(Axk+1+Bzk+1−c).

The state is (zk,yk)(z^k,y^k)(zk,yk); x0x^0x0 plays no role. The primal residual is rk=Axk+Bzk−cr^k=Ax^k+Bz^k-crk=Axk+Bzk−c, the dual residual is sk=ρATB(zk−zk−1)s^k=\rho A^TB(z^k-z^{k-1})sk=ρATB(zk−zk−1), and pk=f(xk)+g(zk)p^k=f(x^k)+g(z^k)pk=f(xk)+g(zk).

Two assumptions are made. Assumption 1: fff and ggg are closed, proper and convex. Assumption 2: L0L_0L0​ has a saddle point (x⋆,z⋆,y⋆)(x^\star,z^\star,y^\star)(x⋆,z⋆,y⋆), i.e. L0(x⋆,z⋆,y)≤L0(x⋆,z⋆,y⋆)≤L0(x,z,y⋆)L_0(x^\star,z^\star,y)\le L_0(x^\star,z^\star,y^\star)\le L_0(x,z,y^\star)L0​(x⋆,z⋆,y)≤L0​(x⋆,z⋆,y⋆)≤L0​(x,z,y⋆) for all x,z,yx,z,yx,z,y. Nothing is assumed about the ranks of AAA and BBB. The convergence proof uses the Lyapunov function

Vk=1ρ∥yk−y⋆∥22+ρ∥B(zk−z⋆)∥22.V^k=\tfrac1\rho\|y^k-y^\star\|_2^2+\rho\|B(z^k-z^\star)\|_2^2 .Vk=ρ1​∥yk−y⋆∥22​+ρ∥B(zk−z⋆)∥22​.

Formalization targets

Goal: residual and objective convergence (§3.2.1, p. 17; Appendix A, p. 106)

Under Assumptions 1 and 2 and for ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, every ADMM run satisfies

rk→0,f(xk)+g(zk)→p⋆,sk→0(k→∞).r^k\to0,\qquad f(x^k)+g(z^k)\to p^\star,\qquad s^k\to0\qquad(k\to\infty).rk→0,f(xk)+g(zk)→p⋆,sk→0(k→∞).

The statement fixes no rate and no constant. It does not claim convergence of xkx^kxk or zkz^kzk, which fails in general (p. 17).

Milestones

In the order of Appendix A:

  1. (3.10) holds along the iteration: 0∈∂g(zk+1)+BTyk+10\in\partial g(z^{k+1})+B^Ty^{k+1}0∈∂g(zk+1)+BTyk+1 (§3.3, p. 18);
  2. the dual residual inclusion ρATB(zk+1−zk)∈∂f(xk+1)+ATyk+1\rho A^TB(z^{k+1}-z^k)\in\partial f(x^{k+1})+A^Ty^{k+1}ρATB(zk+1−zk)∈∂f(xk+1)+ATyk+1 (§3.3, p. 18);
  3. (A.3) p⋆−pk+1≤y⋆Trk+1p^\star-p^{k+1}\le y^{\star T}r^{k+1}p⋆−pk+1≤y⋆Trk+1;
  4. (A.2) pk+1−p⋆≤−(yk+1)Trk+1−ρ(B(zk+1−zk))T(−rk+1+B(zk+1−z⋆))p^{k+1}-p^\star\le-(y^{k+1})^Tr^{k+1}-\rho(B(z^{k+1}-z^k))^T(-r^{k+1}+B(z^{k+1}-z^\star))pk+1−p⋆≤−(yk+1)Trk+1−ρ(B(zk+1−zk))T(−rk+1+B(zk+1−z⋆));
  5. (3.11) pk−p⋆≤−(yk)Trk+(xk−x⋆)Tskp^k-p^\star\le-(y^k)^Tr^k+(x^k-x^\star)^Ts^kpk−p⋆≤−(yk)Trk+(xk−x⋆)Tsk;
  6. the monotonicity step (yk+1−yk)T(B(zk+1−zk))≤0(y^{k+1}-y^k)^T(B(z^{k+1}-z^k))\le0(yk+1−yk)T(B(zk+1−zk))≤0 for k≥1k\ge1k≥1 (p. 110);
  7. (A.6) Vk−Vk+1≥ρ∥rk+1−B(zk+1−zk)∥22V^k-V^{k+1}\ge\rho\|r^{k+1}-B(z^{k+1}-z^k)\|_2^2Vk−Vk+1≥ρ∥rk+1−B(zk+1−zk)∥22​;
  8. (A.1) Vk+1≤Vk−ρ∥rk+1∥22−ρ∥B(zk+1−zk)∥22V^{k+1}\le V^k-\rho\|r^{k+1}\|_2^2-\rho\|B(z^{k+1}-z^k)\|_2^2Vk+1≤Vk−ρ∥rk+1∥22​−ρ∥B(zk+1−zk)∥22​ for k≥1k\ge1k≥1;
  9. the summed bound ρ∑k≥1(∥rk+1∥22+∥B(zk+1−zk)∥22)≤V1\rho\sum_{k\ge1}(\|r^{k+1}\|_2^2+\|B(z^{k+1}-z^k)\|_2^2)\le V^1ρ∑k≥1​(∥rk+1∥22​+∥B(zk+1−zk)∥22​)≤V1, with rk→0r^k\to0rk→0 and B(zk+1−zk)→0B(z^{k+1}-z^k)\to0B(zk+1−zk)→0;
  10. the stopping-rule bound pk−p⋆≤−(yk)Trk+d∥sk∥2≤∥yk∥2∥rk∥2+d∥sk∥2p^k-p^\star\le-(y^k)^Tr^k+d\|s^k\|_2\le\|y^k\|_2\|r^k\|_2+d\|s^k\|_2pk−p⋆≤−(yk)Trk+d∥sk∥2​≤∥yk∥2​∥rk∥2​+d∥sk∥2​ when ∥xk−x⋆∥2≤d\|x^k-x^\star\|_2\le d∥xk−x⋆∥2​≤d (§3.3.1, p. 19).

Significance

The theorem is what licenses every specialized ADMM of the survey (lasso, basis pursuit, covariance selection, consensus and sharing, distributed model fitting): each of these chapters only computes the subproblem solutions, and correctness of the overall method is inherited from §3.2.1. Inequality (3.11) and its corollary in §3.3.1 justify the primal/dual residual stopping criterion (3.12) used in practice: small residuals certify small suboptimality.

The result itself is classical and proved; it is not open. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of convex two-block ADMM convergence exists in Lean's Mathlib. Formalizing it produces a reusable development of the augmented Lagrangian method with explicit domain handling for extended-valued convex functions, and checks a proof whose index bookkeeping the printed text leaves loose (the monotonicity step and (A.1) need k≥1k\ge1k≥1, see below).

Difficulty

The obvious argument, "the subproblem optimality conditions plus the saddle point give a decreasing quantity", works only once the right Lyapunov function is found and the cross term −2ρ r(k+1)TB(zk+1−zk)-2\rho\, r^{(k+1)T}B(z^{k+1}-z^k)−2ρr(k+1)TB(zk+1−zk) is controlled. That term has no sign from the optimality conditions of a single iteration, and at the first iteration, where z0z^0z0 is an arbitrary starting point, the decrease (A.1) can genuinely fail. A second obstacle is that xkx^kxk and zkz^kzk need not converge or even be bounded when AAA or BBB is rank deficient, so objective convergence cannot pass through limits of the primal iterates; it has to come from the two-sided bounds (A.2) and (A.3). Finally, the subdifferential sum rule used to linearize each subproblem must be handled for functions taking the value +∞+\infty+∞.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); matrices act through Matrix.toEuclideanLin; the problem data are bundled in a structure Problem n m p.
  • An extended-valued fff is encoded by its effective domain CfC_fCf​ and its real values on CfC_fCf​. Assumption 1 is: CfC_fCf​ nonempty, fff convex on CfC_fCf​, epigraph over CfC_fCf​ closed. All minimizations, and the saddle-point inequality in (x,z)(x,z)(x,z), range over the domains; this is equivalent to the book's formulation with +∞+\infty+∞.
  • p⋆p^\starp⋆ is the infimum over feasible points of the domains, not f(x⋆)+g(z⋆)f(x^\star)+g(z^\star)f(x⋆)+g(z⋆) by definition.
  • The run is a hypothesis. An ADMM run is any triple of sequences satisfying (3.2)–(3.4) exactly. The book asserts on p. 16 that Assumption 1 makes the subproblems solvable; this is false in general (f(x)=ex1f(x)=e^{x_1}f(x)=ex1​, A=[0 1]A=[0\ 1]A=[0 1]), so no statement constructs iterates. A formalization that defined the iterates by choice, or required Axk+Bzk=cAx^k+Bz^k=cAxk+Bzk=c of a run, would trivialize the residual claim and is ruled out.
  • Indices: k∈Nk\in\mathbb Nk∈N starts at the book's k=0k=0k=0. Statements about xkx^kxk, rkr^krk, sks^ksk, pkp^kpk are for k≥1k\ge1k≥1 (written with k+1k+1k+1). The monotonicity step and (A.1) are stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1; the book states (A.1) without a range, and at k=0k=0k=0 with an arbitrary z0z^0z0 it can fail. The summed bound accordingly starts at k=1k=1k=1 and is bounded by V1V^1V1 instead of V0V^0V0; it is stated as a bound on every partial sum.
  • Subdifferentials (milestones 1–2) use the published ShorNonsmooth.Subdiff.subdifferential relative to the domain.
  • The dual-variable convergence yk→y⋆y^k\to y^\staryk→y⋆ listed in §3.2.1 is not proved in the book and is not a target.

A complete development needs the subdifferential of a convex function plus a differentiable quadratic, the first-order characterization of a constrained minimizer, and elementary limits; all of this is reusable for the later missions of the series, which take ADMM runs as given. Proofs of individual milestones are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato, J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1), 2011, pp. 1–122. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000016
  • D. Gabay, B. Mercier, A dual algorithm for the solution of nonlinear variational problems via finite element approximation, Computers & Mathematics with Applications 2(1), 1976, pp. 17–40. https://doi.org/10.1016/0898-1221(76)90003-1
  • J. Eckstein, D. P. Bertsekas, On the Douglas–Rachford splitting method and the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators, Mathematical Programming 55, 1992, pp. 293–318. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581204
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimality and Duality Theory for Stochastic Optimization Problems with Nonlinear Dominance Constraints 2: With Finite Scenarios and Slater's Condition, Piecewise-Linear Utilities Are MultipliersResearch Paper

Motivation

Second-order stochastic dominance constraints let a decision maker require that a random outcome of a decision be preferred to a fixed benchmark outcome by every risk-averse expected-utility maximizer, without choosing a utility function in advance. Dentcheva and Ruszczyński introduced optimization under such constraints in Optimization with stochastic dominance constraints (SIAM J. Optim., 2003), for the case where the decision enters the outcome linearly (the pure-dominance case). Their follow-up paper, Optimality and duality theory for stochastic optimization problems with nonlinear dominance constraints (Math. Program., 2004), allows the decision to affect many random outcomes in a nonlinear, concave way, and derives optimality and duality theory in which the Lagrange multipliers of the dominance constraints are utility functions.

In applications (portfolio selection against a benchmark index is the paper's own example in §6) the probability space is a finite set of scenarios. Section 5 of the paper specialises the theory to that case. This mission formalizes that section: the reduction of the dominance constraints to finitely many inequalities, and the optimality and duality theorems (Theorems 6 and 7) in which the multipliers become piecewise-linear concave utilities.

Setting

There are nnn scenarios ω1,…,ωn\omega_1,\dots,\omega_nω1​,…,ωn​ with probabilities pj≥0p_j \ge 0pj​≥0, ∑jpj=1\sum_j p_j = 1∑j​pj​=1, and mmm benchmark constraints, indexed by i∈I={1,…,m}i \in I = \{1,\dots,m\}i∈I={1,…,m}; J={1,…,n}J = \{1,\dots,n\}J={1,…,n}. A decision zzz ranges over a convex set Z⊆RNZ \subseteq \mathbb R^NZ⊆RN. For each scenario jjj, hj:RN→Rh_j:\mathbb R^N\to\mathbb Rhj​:RN→R is the objective contribution and gij:RN→Rg_{ij}:\mathbb R^N\to\mathbb Rgij​:RN→R the iiith outcome, all concave. The benchmark YiY_iYi​ has realizations yijy_{ij}yij​. Write (t)+=max⁡(t,0)(t)_+=\max(t,0)(t)+​=max(t,0).

The second-order dominance of a finitely distributed XiX_iXi​ (realizations xijx_{ij}xij​) over YiY_iYi​ on an interval [ai,bi][a_i,b_i][ai​,bi​] reads

∑jpj(η−xij)+≤∑jpj(η−yij)+for all η∈[ai,bi].(36)\sum_{j} p_j(\eta - x_{ij})_+ \le \sum_j p_j(\eta-y_{ij})_+ \quad\text{for all } \eta\in[a_i,b_i]. \tag{36}j∑​pj​(η−xij​)+​≤j∑​pj​(η−yij​)+​for all η∈[ai​,bi​].(36)

The split-variable problem (38)–(41) is

max⁡∑j=1npjhj(z)s.t.∑jpj(yik−xij)+≤∑jpj(yik−yij)+,xik≤gik(z),z∈Z,\max \sum_{j=1}^n p_j h_j(z)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad \sum_{j} p_j(y_{ik}-x_{ij})_+ \le \sum_j p_j(y_{ik}-y_{ij})_+,\quad x_{ik}\le g_{ik}(z),\quad z\in Z,maxj=1∑n​pj​hj​(z)s.t.j∑​pj​(yik​−xij​)+​≤j∑​pj​(yik​−yij​)+​,xik​≤gik​(z),z∈Z,

for all i∈Ii\in Ii∈I, k∈Jk\in Jk∈J, over zzz and X=(xij)∈RmnX=(x_{ij})\in\mathbb R^{mn}X=(xij​)∈Rmn. The Slater condition asks for z~∈relint⁡Z\tilde z \in \operatorname{relint} Zz~∈relintZ and X~\tilde XX~ satisfying the dominance constraints (39) with x~ik<gik(z~)\tilde x_{ik} < g_{ik}(\tilde z)x~ik​<gik​(z~) for all i,ki,ki,k.

The utility set ViV_iVi​ consists of the functions u:R→Ru:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Ru:R→R that are concave, nondecreasing, piecewise linear with break points only at the yiky_{ik}yik​, and zero on [max⁡kyik,∞)[\max_k y_{ik},\infty)[maxk​yik​,∞). With θij≥0\theta_{ij}\ge 0θij​≥0 multipliers for the splitting constraints xij≤gij(z)x_{ij}\le g_{ij}(z)xij​≤gij​(z), the Lagrangian is

L(z,X,u,θ)=∑j=1npj[hj(z)+∑i=1mθijgij(z)]+∑i=1m∑j=1npj[ui(xij)−ui(yij)−θijxij].(42)L(z,X,u,\theta) = \sum_{j=1}^n p_j\Big[h_j(z)+\sum_{i=1}^m\theta_{ij}g_{ij}(z)\Big]+\sum_{i=1}^m\sum_{j=1}^n p_j\big[u_i(x_{ij})-u_i(y_{ij})-\theta_{ij}x_{ij}\big]. \tag{42}L(z,X,u,θ)=j=1∑n​pj​[hj​(z)+i=1∑m​θij​gij​(z)]+i=1∑m​j=1∑n​pj​[ui​(xij​)−ui​(yij​)−θij​xij​].(42)

Multipliers μik\mu_{ik}μik​ of the inequalities (39) generate the utility ui(t)=−∑kμik(yik−t)+u_i(t)=-\sum_k\mu_{ik}(y_{ik}-t)_+ui​(t)=−∑k​μik​(yik​−t)+​ (46). The dual functional is D(u,θ)=sup⁡z∈Z, XL(z,X,u,θ)D(u,\theta)=\sup_{z\in Z,\,X}L(z,X,u,\theta)D(u,θ)=supz∈Z,X​L(z,X,u,θ) (47).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

Under the Slater condition, (z^,X^)(\hat z,\hat X)(z^,X^) optimal for (38)–(41) implies that there are u^i∈Vi\hat u_i\in V_iu^i​∈Vi​ and θ^≥0\hat\theta\ge 0θ^≥0 with

L(z^,X^,u^,θ^)=max⁡(z,X)∈Z×RmnL(z,X,u^,θ^),∑jpj[u^i(x^ij)−u^i(yij)]=0,θ^ij(x^ij−gij(z^))=0;L(\hat z,\hat X,\hat u,\hat\theta)=\max_{(z,X)\in Z\times\mathbb R^{mn}}L(z,X,\hat u,\hat\theta),\qquad \sum_j p_j[\hat u_i(\hat x_{ij})-\hat u_i(y_{ij})]=0,\qquad \hat\theta_{ij}(\hat x_{ij}-g_{ij}(\hat z))=0;L(z^,X^,u^,θ^)=(z,X)∈Z×Rmnmax​L(z,X,u^,θ^),j∑​pj​[u^i​(x^ij​)−u^i​(yij​)]=0,θ^ij​(x^ij​−gij​(z^))=0;

conversely, these conditions together with feasibility imply optimality.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2 (p. 15): if ai≤yij≤bia_i\le y_{ij}\le b_iai​≤yij​≤bi​, then (36) is equivalent to the mnmnmn inequalities (37) at the realizations η=yik\eta=y_{ik}η=yik​, and also to (36) on the whole line.
  2. Eq. (46) (p. 17): for any μ\muμ, the standard Lagrangian Λ(z,X,μ,θ)\Lambda(z,X,\mu,\theta)Λ(z,X,μ,θ) equals L(z,X,u,θ)L(z,X,u,\theta)L(z,X,u,θ) with uuu given by (46).
  3. p. 18: for μi≥0\mu_i\ge0μi​≥0, the utility (46) lies in ViV_iVi​.
  4. pp. 16–17: under Slater, an optimal solution admits Kuhn–Tucker multipliers μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, θ≥0\theta\ge0θ≥0 for (38)–(41) with complementarity.
  5. p. 18: every v∈Viv\in V_iv∈Vi​ is of the form (46) with μi≥0\mu_i\ge0μi​≥0.
  6. Theorem 7 (p. 18), after the goal: the dual problem min⁡{D(u,θ):u∈V1×⋯×Vm, θ≥0}\min\{D(u,\theta): u\in V_1\times\dots\times V_m,\ \theta\ge0\}min{D(u,θ):u∈V1​×⋯×Vm​, θ≥0} has a solution and no duality gap.

Significance

Theorem 6 says that, for finitely many scenarios, the infinite-dimensional multiplier of the general theory (a concave utility in a cone of functions, Theorem 2 of the paper) can always be taken piecewise linear with kinks exactly at the benchmark's realizations. The multiplier space becomes finite-dimensional, ViV_iVi​ is a polyhedral cone, and the dual problem of Theorem 7 is a finite-dimensional convex program. The paper's decomposition (49)–(51) of the dual functional and its numerical method in §6 rest on this. Lemma 2 is the standard reduction that makes dominance against a finitely distributed benchmark a finite set of polyhedral constraints, used throughout the later literature on dominance-constrained portfolio optimization.

The results are proved in the paper; none of them is formalized. The mission produces machine-checked statements of the finite-scenario theory, a Lean model of the utility set ViV_iVi​ and of the correspondence between nonnegative multipliers and piecewise-linear utilities, and a Kuhn–Tucker theorem for concave programs with polyhedral constraints and a relative-interior Slater point.

Difficulty

The obvious route to Theorem 6 is to invoke a Kuhn–Tucker theorem. The available formal versions require every inequality constraint to hold strictly at the Slater point and range over all of RN\mathbb R^NRN. Neither fits: the dominance constraint at the smallest realization yi,[1]y_{i,[1]}yi,[1]​ has right-hand side 000 and a nonnegative left-hand side, so it can never hold strictly, and ZZZ may be lower-dimensional (a simplex), so only its relative interior is available. The polyhedral structure of (39) must be used, as in Rockafellar's Theorem 28.2. The second obstacle is the converse direction of the multiplier–utility correspondence: a utility in ViV_iVi​ must be written as a nonnegative combination of the kinks (yik−t)+(y_{ik}-t)_+(yik​−t)+​, which requires handling repeated realizations and the one-sided slopes at each break point.

Formalization scope

  • RN\mathbb R^NRN is Fin N → ℝ; XXX, θ\thetaθ, μ\muμ are Fin m → Fin n → ℝ; expectations are finite sums and positive parts are max t 0. No measure theory is used.
  • Probabilities satisfy pj≥0p_j\ge0pj​≥0, ∑jpj=1\sum_jp_j=1∑j​pj​=1; pj=0p_j=0pj​=0 is allowed, as on the page.
  • Standing assumptions of p. 2 are explicit hypotheses: ZZZ convex and hjh_jhj​, gijg_{ij}gij​ concave on RN\mathbb R^NRN. Continuity is not stated, since finite concave functions on RN\mathbb R^NRN are continuous.
  • The relative interior is intrinsicInterior ℝ Z, not the topological interior. In the Slater condition only the splitting constraints are strict; the dominance constraints hold non-strictly.
  • ViV_iVi​ is defined by concavity, monotonicity, affinity on every interval whose interior contains no yiky_{ik}yik​, and u=0u=0u=0 on [max⁡kyik,∞)[\max_ky_{ik},\infty)[maxk​yik​,∞). This last clause is the page's u(yi,[n])=0u(y_{i,[n]})=0u(yi,[n]​)=0 combined with Vi⊂U1([ai,bi])V_i\subset\mathcal U_1([a_i,b_i])Vi​⊂U1​([ai​,bi​]). No positive slope is required, because the printed "c>0c>0c>0" in U1\mathcal U_1U1​ is a misprint for c≥0c\ge0c≥0.
  • "max" in (43) is an attained maximum over all of Z×RmnZ\times\mathbb R^{mn}Z×Rmn, with no constraints on XXX. The dual functional (47) is an EReal supremum.
  • Theorem 6 keeps the Slater condition as a hypothesis of the whole statement, as printed, although its converse part does not use it.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out. ViV_iVi​ is not defined as the set of functions of the form (46), which would make milestones 3 and 5 true by definition. Slater does not require strict dominance constraints, which would make it unsatisfiable. A sorry-free check confirms that the goal's hypotheses hold on an instance (n=2n=2n=2, Z=[0,1]Z=[0,1]Z=[0,1]).
  • Reusable beyond this mission: the Kuhn–Tucker theorem with polyhedral constraints and relative-interior Slater point (milestone 4), and Lemma 2. Proofs of any item, and alternative proofs of the goal that avoid milestone 4, are welcome.
  • The pure-dominance case is the earlier paper of Dentcheva–Ruszczyński (2003). The function F2F_2F2​ and its expected-shortfall form are due to Ogryczak–Ruszczyński. The general Lagrange duality on the platform (ConvexOptimization.slater_strong_duality, Boyd–Vandenberghe §5.3.2) assumes a strict Slater point for every constraint and no set constraint, so it does not cover milestone 4.

Selected references

  • D. Dentcheva, A. Ruszczyński, Optimality and duality theory for stochastic optimization problems with nonlinear dominance constraints, Math. Program., 2004 (cited here from the authors' revised manuscript, April 2003). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-003-0453-z
  • D. Dentcheva, A. Ruszczyński, Optimization with stochastic dominance constraints, SIAM J. Optim. 14 (2003) 548–566. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623402420528
  • W. Ogryczak, A. Ruszczyński, Dual stochastic dominance and related mean-risk models, SIAM J. Optim. 13 (2002) 60–78. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623400375075
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970, §28. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Numerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity XIII: Newton's Method Converges Quadratically, ‖x_{k+1} − x*‖ ≤ (M/μ)‖x_k − x*‖², from ‖x₀ − x*‖ ≤ μ/(2M)Textbook

Motivation

Newton's method is the basic second-order method of continuous optimization: at the current point it replaces the objective by its second-order Taylor model and jumps to the stationary point of that model. Its defining property is speed near a nondegenerate minimum, where the error is squared at every step, so that the number of correct digits roughly doubles per iteration. This local behaviour is what makes Newton's method the inner engine of interior point methods, the polynomial-time algorithms for linear, conic and general convex programming (Nesterov and Nemirovski, 1994). In S. Bubeck's monograph Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning, 2015; arXiv:1405.4980v2), §5.3.2 recalls the traditional local analysis of Newton's method, Theorem 5.3, before turning to the affine-invariant self-concordance analysis used for interior point methods. This mission formalizes that theorem and the four steps of its proof.

Setting

Let Rn\mathbb R^nRn carry the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and write ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥ for the operator norm of a linear map A:Rn→RnA:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nA:Rn→Rn, so that ∥Ax∥≤∥A∥ ∥x∥\|Ax\|\le\|A\|\,\|x\|∥Ax∥≤∥A∥∥x∥. Let f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R be a C2C^2C2 function, with gradient ∇f(x)∈Rn\nabla f(x)\in\mathbb R^n∇f(x)∈Rn and Hessian ∇2f(x)\nabla^2 f(x)∇2f(x), a linear map Rn→Rn\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nRn→Rn (the derivative of the gradient map). For a real number ccc, A⪰cInA\succeq cI_nA⪰cIn​ means ⟨Av,v⟩≥c∥v∥2\langle Av,v\rangle\ge c\|v\|^2⟨Av,v⟩≥c∥v∥2 for all v∈Rnv\in\mathbb R^nv∈Rn.

The Hessian is MMM-Lipschitz if ∥∇2f(x)−∇2f(y)∥≤M∥x−y∥\|\nabla^2 f(x)-\nabla^2 f(y)\|\le M\|x-y\|∥∇2f(x)−∇2f(y)∥≤M∥x−y∥ for all x,y∈Rnx,y\in\mathbb R^nx,y∈Rn.

Newton's method starts at x0∈Rnx_0\in\mathbb R^nx0​∈Rn and iterates, for k≥0k\ge0k≥0,

xk+1=xk−[∇2f(xk)]−1∇f(xk).x_{k+1}=x_k-[\nabla^2 f(x_k)]^{-1}\nabla f(x_k).xk+1​=xk​−[∇2f(xk​)]−1∇f(xk​).

A point x∗x^*x∗ is a local minimum of fff if f(x∗)≤f(x)f(x^*)\le f(x)f(x∗)≤f(x) for all xxx in a neighbourhood of x∗x^*x∗; it has strictly positive Hessian if ∇2f(x∗)⪰μIn\nabla^2 f(x^*)\succeq\mu I_n∇2f(x∗)⪰μIn​ for some μ>0\mu>0μ>0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3 (p. 320)

Assume the Hessian of fff is MMM-Lipschitz, M>0M>0M>0, and x∗x^*x∗ is a local minimum with ∇2f(x∗)⪰μIn\nabla^2 f(x^*)\succeq\mu I_n∇2f(x∗)⪰μIn​, μ>0\mu>0μ>0. If ∥x0−x∗∥≤μ/(2M)\|x_0-x^*\|\le\mu/(2M)∥x0​−x∗∥≤μ/(2M), then Newton's method from x0x_0x0​ is well defined (every Hessian along the iterates is invertible, so the sequence exists and is unique) and

∥xk+1−x∗∥≤Mμ ∥xk−x∗∥2(k≥0),xk→x∗.\|x_{k+1}-x^*\|\le\frac M\mu\,\|x_k-x^*\|^2\quad(k\ge0),\qquad x_k\to x^*.∥xk+1​−x∗∥≤μM​∥xk​−x∗∥2(k≥0),xk​→x∗.

Milestones (p. 321, the steps of the proof)

  1. The integral formula ∫01∇2f(x+sh) h ds=∇f(x+h)−∇f(x)\int_0^1\nabla^2 f(x+sh)\,h\,ds=\nabla f(x+h)-\nabla f(x)∫01​∇2f(x+sh)hds=∇f(x+h)−∇f(x).
  2. The error representation of one Newton step, xk+1−x∗=[∇2f(xk)]−1∫01[∇2f(xk)−∇2f(x∗+s(xk−x∗))](xk−x∗) dsx_{k+1}-x^*=[\nabla^2 f(x_k)]^{-1}\int_0^1[\nabla^2 f(x_k)-\nabla^2 f(x^*+s(x_k-x^*))](x_k-x^*)\,dsxk+1​−x∗=[∇2f(xk​)]−1∫01​[∇2f(xk​)−∇2f(x∗+s(xk​−x∗))](xk​−x∗)ds.
  3. The Lipschitz bound ∫01∥∇2f(xk)−∇2f(x∗+s(xk−x∗))∥ ds≤M2∥xk−x∗∥\int_0^1\|\nabla^2 f(x_k)-\nabla^2 f(x^*+s(x_k-x^*))\|\,ds\le\frac M2\|x_k-x^*\|∫01​∥∇2f(xk​)−∇2f(x∗+s(xk​−x∗))∥ds≤2M​∥xk​−x∗∥.
  4. The Hessian lower bound ∇2f(xk)⪰(μ−M∥xk−x∗∥)In⪰μ2In\nabla^2 f(x_k)\succeq(\mu-M\|x_k-x^*\|)I_n\succeq\frac\mu2I_n∇2f(xk​)⪰(μ−M∥xk​−x∗∥)In​⪰2μ​In​ when ∥xk−x∗∥≤μ/(2M)\|x_k-x^*\|\le\mu/(2M)∥xk​−x∗∥≤μ/(2M).

Significance

The theorem gives a quantitative basin of quadratic convergence: an explicit radius μ/(2M)\mu/(2M)μ/(2M), depending only on the curvature at the minimum and the Lipschitz constant of the Hessian, inside which Newton's method needs only O(log⁡log⁡(1/ε))O(\log\log(1/\varepsilon))O(loglog(1/ε)) iterations to reach accuracy ε\varepsilonε. It is the classical statement whose shortcomings (dependence on a choice of norm, constants that change under linear changes of variables) motivate the self-concordance theory of the following subsections, and it is the local convergence result invoked whenever a damped or globalized Newton scheme is shown to enter its quadratic phase.

On the formal side, Mathlib has the calculus this needs (Fréchet derivatives, interval integrals of vector-valued maps, operator norms) but no convergence theorem for multivariate Newton's method for minimization. A formal proof produces reusable pieces: the integral form of the mean value theorem for gradients, the stability of a positive-definite lower bound under Lipschitz perturbations, and an inverse-operator norm bound from a quadratic-form lower bound. The result itself is classical and fully proved in the literature; what is open here is its machine-checked proof in this form.

Difficulty

The individual inequalities are short, but the argument is an induction in which well-definedness and the rate are proved together: the Hessian at xkx_kxk​ is invertible only because xkx_kxk​ is still in the ball of radius μ/(2M)\mu/(2M)μ/(2M), and xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​ stays in that ball only because of the rate. A proof that first assumes the sequence exists and then bounds it is circular. The proof also passes between two kinds of control on the Hessian, a lower bound on its quadratic form and an operator-norm bound on its inverse, and the second is only meaningful once invertibility is established. Finally, the integral manipulations need integrability of the maps s↦∇2f(x∗+s(xk−x∗))(xk−x∗)s\mapsto\nabla^2 f(x^*+s(x_k-x^*))(x_k-x^*)s↦∇2f(x∗+s(xk​−x∗))(xk​−x∗), which comes from the continuity of the Hessian.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The gradient and Hessian are explicit maps g:Rn→Rng:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^ng:Rn→Rn and H:Rn→(Rn→LRn)H:\mathbb R^n\to(\mathbb R^n\to_L\mathbb R^n)H:Rn→(Rn→L​Rn) with ContDiff ℝ 2 f, HasGradientAt f (g x) x and HasFDerivAt g (H x) x at every point; the norm on H(x)H(x)H(x) is Mathlib's operator norm, as on the page. A⪰cInA\succeq cI_nA⪰cIn​ is the quadratic-form inequality. A Newton run is a sequence x:N→Rnx:\mathbb N\to\mathbb R^nx:N→Rn indexed from 000 satisfying the linear system ∇2f(xk)(xk−xk+1)=∇f(xk)\nabla^2 f(x_k)(x_k-x_{k+1})=\nabla f(x_k)∇2f(xk​)(xk​−xk+1​)=∇f(xk​); no inverse of a possibly singular operator appears in any hypothesis, and "well defined" is a conclusion: a unique run exists from x0x_0x0​ and every Hessian along it is bijective. The rate and xk→x∗x_k\to x^*xk​→x∗ are asserted for every run. The error representation is stated with both sides multiplied by ∇2f(xk)\nabla^2 f(x_k)∇2f(xk​), which is equivalent to the printed form once the Hessian is invertible. Milestones 3 and 4 use only the Lipschitz property and are stated for any Lipschitz map HHH.

Added hypothesis: M>0M>0M>0 (the radius μ/(2M)\mu/(2M)μ/(2M) divides by MMM; with M=0M=0M=0, Lean's convention μ/0=0\mu/0=0μ/0=0 would collapse the hypothesis to x0=x∗x_0=x^*x0​=x∗). Convexity of fff is not assumed, as on the page; x∗x^*x∗ is a local minimum and ∇f(x∗)=0\nabla f(x^*)=0∇f(x∗)=0 is derived, not assumed. Encoding the Newton step with Lean's inverse (which returns 000 on singular maps), or replacing ∇2f(x∗)⪰μIn\nabla^2 f(x^*)\succeq\mu I_n∇2f(x∗)⪰μIn​ by mere invertibility, would change the theorem and is ruled out.

A complete development needs the fundamental theorem of calculus for C1C^1C1 vector-valued maps along segments, Hessian-based quadratic-form estimates, and operator-norm bounds for inverses; all are reusable for the analysis of damped Newton, cubic regularization and interior point methods. Proofs of the milestones independently of the goal are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. arXiv:1405.4980v2, §5.3.2, Theorem 5.3, pp. 320–321.
  • Yu. Nesterov and A. Nemirovski, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM Studies in Applied Mathematics 13, 1994. doi:10.1137/1.9781611970791
  • Yu. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004, Theorem 1.2.5. doi:10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity X: Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Descent on a β-Smooth α-Strongly Convex Function Has Rate ((α + β)/2)‖x₁ − x*‖² exp(−(t − 1)/√κ)Textbook

Why accelerated rates matter

First-order methods, which query only function values and gradients, are the workhorse of large-scale optimization in machine learning, signal processing and operations research, because each step costs little more than one gradient evaluation. For a function that is both strongly convex and smooth, plain gradient descent converges geometrically, but the number of steps needed to reach accuracy ε\varepsilonε scales with the condition number κ\kappaκ of the problem. In 1983 Nesterov showed that a gradient method with a carefully chosen momentum term needs a number of steps proportional to κ\sqrt\kappaκ​ instead, and that this is optimal for black-box first-order methods. On ill-conditioned problems, where κ\kappaκ is in the thousands or millions, the difference between κ\kappaκ and κ\sqrt\kappaκ​ is the difference between practical and impractical.

This mission is the tenth of a series formalizing S. Bubeck's monograph Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning, 2015; arXiv:1405.4980v2). It covers §3.7.1, the smooth and strongly convex case of Nesterov's accelerated gradient descent, and its main result, Theorem 3.18.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean inner product x⊤yx^\top yx⊤y and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R be differentiable with gradient ∇f\nabla f∇f.

  • fff is β\betaβ-smooth if its gradient is β\betaβ-Lipschitz: ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤β∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le\beta\|x-y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤β∥x−y∥ for all x,yx,yx,y.
  • fff is α\alphaα-strongly convex (α>0\alpha>0α>0) if for all x,yx,yx,y
f(y)≥f(x)+∇f(x)⊤(y−x)+α2∥y−x∥2.f(y)\ge f(x)+\nabla f(x)^\top(y-x)+\frac\alpha2\|y-x\|^2 .f(y)≥f(x)+∇f(x)⊤(y−x)+2α​∥y−x∥2.
  • The condition number is κ=β/α\kappa=\beta/\alphaκ=β/α; for n≥1n\ge1n≥1 one always has κ≥1\kappa\ge1κ≥1.
  • x∗x^*x∗ denotes a minimizer of fff on Rn\mathbb R^nRn.

Nesterov's accelerated gradient descent starts at an arbitrary point x1=y1x_1=y_1x1​=y1​ and iterates, for t≥1t\ge1t≥1,

yt+1=xt−1β∇f(xt),xt+1=(1+κ−1κ+1)yt+1−κ−1κ+1 yt.y_{t+1}=x_t-\frac1\beta\nabla f(x_t),\qquad x_{t+1}=\Big(1+\frac{\sqrt\kappa-1}{\sqrt\kappa+1}\Big)y_{t+1}-\frac{\sqrt\kappa-1}{\sqrt\kappa+1}\,y_t .yt+1​=xt​−β1​∇f(xt​),xt+1​=(1+κ​+1κ​−1​)yt+1​−κ​+1κ​−1​yt​.

The point yt+1y_{t+1}yt+1​ is a gradient step from xtx_txt​, and xt+1x_{t+1}xt+1​ moves beyond yt+1y_{t+1}yt+1​ in the direction yt+1−yty_{t+1}-y_tyt+1​−yt​ by the fixed momentum factor (κ−1)/(κ+1)(\sqrt\kappa-1)/(\sqrt\kappa+1)(κ​−1)/(κ​+1).

The analysis in the book uses auxiliary quadratic functions Φs\Phi_sΦs​ (an estimate sequence), defined from the points xsx_sxs​ by

Φ1(x)=f(x1)+α2∥x−x1∥2,Φs+1(x)=(1−1κ)Φs(x)+1κ(f(xs)+∇f(xs)⊤(x−xs)+α2∥x−xs∥2),\Phi_1(x)=f(x_1)+\frac\alpha2\|x-x_1\|^2,\qquad \Phi_{s+1}(x)=\Big(1-\frac1{\sqrt\kappa}\Big)\Phi_s(x)+\frac1{\sqrt\kappa}\Big(f(x_s)+\nabla f(x_s)^\top(x-x_s)+\frac\alpha2\|x-x_s\|^2\Big),Φ1​(x)=f(x1​)+2α​∥x−x1​∥2,Φs+1​(x)=(1−κ​1​)Φs​(x)+κ​1​(f(xs​)+∇f(xs​)⊤(x−xs​)+2α​∥x−xs​∥2),

together with their centres vsv_svs​ (with v1=x1v_1=x_1v1​=x1​ and the recursion (3.21) of the book) and their minimum values Φs∗\Phi^*_sΦs∗​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.18

For every run of the method and every t≥1t\ge1t≥1,

f(yt)−f(x∗)≤α+β2 ∥x1−x∗∥2exp⁡(−t−1κ).f(y_t)-f(x^*)\le\frac{\alpha+\beta}2\,\|x_1-x^*\|^2\exp\Big(-\frac{t-1}{\sqrt\kappa}\Big).f(yt​)−f(x∗)≤2α+β​∥x1​−x∗∥2exp(−κ​t−1​).

Milestones, from the book's proof

  1. (3.18): Φs+1(x)≤f(x)+(1−1/κ)s(Φ1(x)−f(x))\Phi_{s+1}(x)\le f(x)+(1-1/\sqrt\kappa)^s(\Phi_1(x)-f(x))Φs+1​(x)≤f(x)+(1−1/κ​)s(Φ1​(x)−f(x)) for all xxx.
  2. (3.19): f(ys)≤min⁡x∈RnΦs(x)f(y_s)\le\min_{x\in\mathbb R^n}\Phi_s(x)f(ys​)≤minx∈Rn​Φs​(x).
  3. The geometric rate: f(yt)−f(x∗)≤α+β2∥x1−x∗∥2(1−1/κ)t−1f(y_t)-f(x^*)\le\frac{\alpha+\beta}2\|x_1-x^*\|^2(1-1/\sqrt\kappa)^{t-1}f(yt​)−f(x∗)≤2α+β​∥x1​−x∗∥2(1−1/κ​)t−1.
  4. The form Φs(x)=Φs∗+α2∥x−vs∥2\Phi_s(x)=\Phi^*_s+\frac\alpha2\|x-v_s\|^2Φs​(x)=Φs∗​+2α​∥x−vs​∥2 with vsv_svs​ given by (3.21).
  5. The identity (3.22) for Φs+1∗\Phi^*_{s+1}Φs+1∗​.
  6. The inequality (3.20), the inductive step of (3.19).
  7. The coupling vs−xs=κ (xs−ys)v_s-x_s=\sqrt\kappa\,(x_s-y_s)vs​−xs​=κ​(xs​−ys​).

The geometric form in milestone 3 is slightly stronger than the goal, which follows from 1−u≤e−u1-u\le e^{-u}1−u≤e−u.

Significance

Theorem 3.18 gives ε\varepsilonε-accuracy after O(κlog⁡(1/ε))O(\sqrt\kappa\log(1/\varepsilon))O(κ​log(1/ε)) gradient evaluations. Projected gradient descent with step 1/β1/\beta1/β on the same class contracts only at the rate exp⁡(−t/κ)\exp(-t/\kappa)exp(−t/κ) (Theorem 3.10 of the book). The lower bound of Theorem 3.15 shows that no black-box first-order method can do better than ((κ−1)/(κ+1))2(t−1)((\sqrt\kappa-1)/(\sqrt\kappa+1))^{2(t-1)}((κ​−1)/(κ​+1))2(t−1), so the accelerated rate is optimal up to constants. The estimate-sequence argument is the template for many later accelerated methods: proximal, stochastic and variance-reduced variants such as Katyusha, and accelerated coordinate descent.

The result is classical and fully proved on paper. No machine-checked proof of the accelerated rate for strongly convex smooth functions is known to exist in Lean's Mathlib. This mission produces one, with the estimate sequence Φs\Phi_sΦs​, its centres and its minimum values as reusable objects, and with every algebraic identity of the book's proof stated separately.

Difficulty

The algorithm is two lines, but its analysis is not a one-step contraction: neither ∥xt−x∗∥\|x_t-x^*\|∥xt​−x∗∥ nor f(yt)−f(x∗)f(y_t)-f(x^*)f(yt​)−f(x∗) decreases by the factor 1−1/κ1-1/\sqrt\kappa1−1/κ​ at every step. A Lyapunov argument for gradient descent, applied directly to yty_tyt​, gives only the rate 1−1/κ1-1/\kappa1−1/κ. The book obtains the rate through the auxiliary functions Φs\Phi_sΦs​. The inequality (3.18) is easy, but (3.19), that the minimum of Φs\Phi_sΦs​ never drops below f(ys)f(y_s)f(ys​), depends on the exact choice of the momentum factor. It holds only through the identity vs−xs=κ(xs−ys)v_s-x_s=\sqrt\kappa(x_s-y_s)vs​−xs​=κ​(xs​−ys​), which ties the centre of Φs\Phi_sΦs​ to the iterates. Formally, the obstacles are the bookkeeping of the recursive quadratics on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and the algebra in κ\sqrt\kappaκ​, 1/κ1/\sqrt\kappa1/κ​ and 1/(ακ)=κ/β1/(\alpha\sqrt\kappa)=\sqrt\kappa/\beta1/(ακ​)=κ​/β.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The gradient is an explicit map g with HasGradientAt f (g x) x at every point, which is part of the smoothness predicate IsBetaSmooth f g β. Strong convexity is the published definition OnlineConvexOpt.ConvexBasics.StronglyConvexOn Set.univ f g α, which is the book's (3.13).
  • A run of the method is a predicate IsNesterovSCRun g α β x y on two sequences indexed from 111, with x1=y1x_1=y_1x1​=y1​ arbitrary. Every theorem holds for every run, that is, every starting point.
  • κ\kappaκ is kappa α β = β / α. All theorems assume α>0\alpha>0α>0 and β>0\beta>0β>0. The second is implied by the other hypotheses for n≥1n\ge1n≥1; no hypothesis α≤β\alpha\le\betaα≤β is added.
  • The existence of a minimizer x∗x^*x∗ is the book's standing assumption, written as a hypothesis.
  • Φs\Phi_sΦs​, vsv_svs​ and Φs∗=Φs(vs)\Phi^*_s=\Phi_s(v_s)Φs∗​=Φs​(vs​) are explicit recursive definitions. The book's Φs∗=min⁡Φs\Phi^*_s=\min\Phi_sΦs∗​=minΦs​ is recovered by milestone 4, and no real infimum is used. The minimum in (3.19) is stated as f(ys)≤Φs(x)f(y_s)\le\Phi_s(x)f(ys​)≤Φs​(x) for every xxx.
  • The identities of milestones 4, 5 and 7 are algebraic and are stated without convexity or smoothness, for arbitrary sequences or runs.
  • Ruled out as trivializing: a run predicate that drops x1=y1x_1=y_1x1​=y1​ breaks (3.19) at s=1s=1s=1 and is not used. A minimum value Φs∗\Phi^*_sΦs∗​ defined through (3.22) would make that identity a tautology, so Φs∗\Phi^*_sΦs∗​ is defined as a value of Φs\Phi_sΦs​.
  • The definitions are local to the namespace ConvexOptAlg.NesterovStrong. β-smoothness duplicates the predicate of other missions of the series and will be merged afterwards. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, and general lemmas on quadratics z↦c+α2∥z−v∥2z\mapsto c+\frac\alpha2\|z-v\|^2z↦c+2α​∥z−v∥2 that the algebraic milestones need.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. arXiv:1405.4980v2, §3.7.1, Theorem 3.18, pp. 290–293.
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Mathematics Doklady 27:372–376, 1983.
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. doi:10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity VIII: No Black-Box Method Beats 3β‖x₁ − x*‖²/(32(t + 1)²) on β-Smooth Convex FunctionsTextbook

Why lower bounds for first-order methods

Upper bounds for an optimization method say how fast it converges; oracle complexity lower bounds say how fast any method of a given kind can possibly converge. Chapter 3 of S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4), 2015, arXiv:1405.4980) proves upper bounds for subgradient descent on Lipschitz functions and for gradient methods on smooth functions. Section 3.5 (Lower bounds, pp. 279–283) shows that these rates cannot be improved by more than a numerical constant, as long as the number of queries is smaller than the dimension. For smooth convex functions the matching lower bound is what identifies Nesterov's accelerated gradient descent, with its 1/t21/t^21/t2 rate, as an optimal method.

Timeline. The lower bounds first appeared in A. Nemirovski and D. Yudin, Problem Complexity and Method Efficiency in Optimization (Wiley, 1983). The presentation followed by the book, with an explicit tridiagonal quadratic as the hard instance and the "span of past gradients" restriction on the method, is that of Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization (Kluwer, 2004), §2.1.2. Nesterov's accelerated method (1983) attains the matching upper bound.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean inner product x⊤yx^\top yx⊤y, coordinates x(1),…,x(n)x(1),\dots,x(n)x(1),…,x(n), canonical basis e1,…,ene_1,\dots,e_ne1​,…,en​ and balls B2(R)={x:∥x∥≤R}\mathrm B_2(R)=\{x:\|x\|\le R\}B2​(R)={x:∥x∥≤R}. A first-order oracle for fff answers a query xxx with a subgradient g∈∂f(x)g\in\partial f(x)g∈∂f(x) (the gradient when fff is differentiable). A black-box procedure maps the history (x1,g1,…,xt,gt)(x_1,g_1,\dots,x_t,g_t)(x1​,g1​,…,xt​,gt​) to the next query xt+1x_{t+1}xt+1​. Section 3.5 restricts attention to procedures with

x1=0,xt+1∈Span(g1,…,gt)(t≥0),(3.15)x_1=0,\qquad x_{t+1}\in\mathrm{Span}(g_1,\dots,g_t)\quad(t\ge0), \tag{3.15}x1​=0,xt+1​∈Span(g1​,…,gt​)(t≥0),(3.15)

which covers gradient descent, its accelerated variants and conjugate gradient. A function is β\betaβ-smooth if its gradient is β\betaβ-Lipschitz; LLL-Lipschitz on X\mathcal XX if every subgradient at every point of X\mathcal XX has norm at most LLL; α\alphaα-strongly convex if x↦f(x)−α2∥x∥2x\mapsto f(x)-\frac\alpha2\|x\|^2x↦f(x)−2α​∥x∥2 is convex.

The hard smooth instance uses, for k≤nk\le nk≤n, the symmetric tridiagonal matrix AkA_kAk​ with entries 222 on the first kkk diagonal positions and −1-1−1 on the neighbouring off-diagonal positions of the leading k×kk\times kk×k block, zero elsewhere, and the quadratics

fk(x)=β8x⊤Akx−β4x⊤e1,fk∗=inf⁡x∈Rnfk(x).f_k(x)=\frac\beta8x^\top A_kx-\frac\beta4x^\top e_1 ,\qquad f_k^*=\inf_{x\in\mathbb R^n}f_k(x).fk​(x)=8β​x⊤Ak​x−4β​x⊤e1​,fk∗​=x∈Rninf​fk​(x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.14 (p. 282)

For 1≤t≤n−121\le t\le\frac{n-1}21≤t≤2n−1​ and β>0\beta>0β>0 there are a β\betaβ-smooth convex fff and a minimizer x∗x^*x∗ such that every procedure satisfying (3.15) has

min⁡1≤s≤tf(xs)−f(x∗) ≥ 3β32 ∥x1−x∗∥2(t+1)2.\min_{1\le s\le t}f(x_s)-f(x^*)\ \ge\ \frac{3\beta}{32}\,\frac{\|x_1-x^*\|^2}{(t+1)^2}.1≤s≤tmin​f(xs​)−f(x∗) ≥ 323β​(t+1)2∥x1​−x∗∥2​.

The constant 3/323/323/32 is the book's.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 3.14, pp. 282–283)

  1. 0⪯Ak⪯4In0\preceq A_k\preceq4I_n0⪯Ak​⪯4In​, through x⊤Akx=x(1)2+x(k)2+∑i=1k−1(x(i)−x(i+1))2x^\top A_kx=x(1)^2+x(k)^2+\sum_{i=1}^{k-1}(x(i)-x(i+1))^2x⊤Ak​x=x(1)2+x(k)2+∑i=1k−1​(x(i)−x(i+1))2.
  2. For f=f2t+1f=f_{2t+1}f=f2t+1​ and any procedure satisfying (3.15), xs∈Span(e1,…,es−1)x_s\in\mathrm{Span}(e_1,\dots,e_{s-1})xs​∈Span(e1​,…,es−1​); hence f(xs)=fs(xs)f(x_s)=f_s(x_s)f(xs​)=fs​(xs​) for s≤ts\le ts≤t.
  3. xk∗(i)=1−ik+1x_k^*(i)=1-\frac i{k+1}xk∗​(i)=1−k+1i​ solves Akx=e1A_kx=e_1Ak​x=e1​, minimizes fkf_kfk​, and fk∗=−β8(1−1k+1)f_k^*=-\frac\beta8\bigl(1-\frac1{k+1}\bigr)fk∗​=−8β​(1−k+11​).
  4. ∥xk∗∥2≤k+13\|x_k^*\|^2\le\frac{k+1}3∥xk∗​∥2≤3k+1​.
  5. ft∗−f2t+1∗=β8(1t+1−12t+2)≥3β32∥x2t+1∗∥2(t+1)2f_t^*-f_{2t+1}^*=\frac\beta8\bigl(\frac1{t+1}-\frac1{2t+2}\bigr)\ge\frac{3\beta}{32}\frac{\|x^*_{2t+1}\|^2}{(t+1)^2}ft∗​−f2t+1∗​=8β​(t+11​−2t+21​)≥323β​(t+1)2∥x2t+1∗​∥2​.

Companion: Theorem 3.13 (p. 280)

For 1≤t≤n1\le t\le n1≤t≤n and L,R>0L,R>0L,R>0 there are a convex fff, LLL-Lipschitz on B2(R)\mathrm B_2(R)B2​(R), and a first-order oracle for it such that every procedure satisfying (3.15) has min⁡s≤tf(xs)−min⁡B2(R)f≥RL2(1+t)\min_{s\le t}f(x_s)-\min_{\mathrm B_2(R)}f\ge\frac{RL}{2(1+\sqrt t)}mins≤t​f(xs​)−minB2​(R)​f≥2(1+t​)RL​; and for α>0\alpha>0α>0 there are an α\alphaα-strongly convex fff, LLL-Lipschitz on B2(L2α)\mathrm B_2(\frac L{2\alpha})B2​(2αL​), and an oracle with gap at least L28αt\frac{L^2}{8\alpha t}8αtL2​ over that ball.

Significance

The upper bounds of Chapter 3 (projected subgradient descent at rate RL/tRL/\sqrt tRL/t​, accelerated gradient descent at rate β∥x1−x∗∥2/t2\beta\|x_1-x^*\|^2/t^2β∥x1​−x∗∥2/t2) become optimal statements only through these lower bounds: no method in the class (3.15) can be faster by more than a constant factor while ttt is below the dimension. The restriction to t≲nt\lesssim nt≲n is necessary, since Chapter 2's cutting-plane methods converge exponentially once the number of queries exceeds the dimension.

The results are classical and proved. Formalizing them yields machine-checked versions of the quadratic-form computation for the tridiagonal matrix, of the Krylov-type support argument under (3.15), and of the explicit minimizer of fkf_kfk​, each reusable in other lower-bound arguments (Theorem 3.15 in ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​, lower bounds for strongly convex smooth functions, conjugate gradient analyses). The platform held no formal statement of these oracle lower bounds when this mission was drafted.

Difficulty

Each analytic step is elementary; the difficulty is in the bookkeeping. The span argument is an induction that must track, at each step, that the gradient of a tridiagonal quadratic at a vector supported on the first s−1s-1s−1 coordinates is supported on the first sss, and that the span hypothesis transfers this to the next query. The minimizer computation requires solving Akx=e1A_kx=e_1Ak​x=e1​ on the leading block and showing that the coordinates beyond kkk do not affect fkf_kfk​. A natural first attempt, choosing the hard function after seeing the procedure, proves a much weaker statement and is excluded by the quantifier order: the function is fixed first and must defeat every procedure.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). Coordinates in Lean are 0-based; the definitions provide the book's 1-based coordinate coord x i and basis vector basisVec n i, and the matrix tridiag n k translates book index iii to Fin n index i−1i-1i−1. The query sequence starts at index 111. The oracle is a fixed map ggg, so (3.15) reads xt+1∈Span(g(x1),…,g(xt))x_{t+1}\in\mathrm{Span}(g(x_1),\dots,g(x_t))xt+1​∈Span(g(x1​),…,g(xt​)) with x1=0x_1=0x1​=0. In Theorem 3.14 the oracle is the gradient, given as a map with HasGradientAt everywhere; β\betaβ-smoothness is the Lipschitz bound on that map. In Theorem 3.13 the oracle is part of what is constructed, because the book's proof uses a specific "resisting" subgradient selection and the claim fails for an arbitrary one.

Committed conventions, each stated in the item's Formalization Note: the minimum over 1≤s≤t1\le s\le t1≤s≤t is the bound for every such sss, and t≥1t\ge1t≥1 is required; t≤(n−1)/2t\le(n-1)/2t≤(n−1)/2 is 2t+1≤n2t+1\le n2t+1≤n; the minimizer x∗x^*x∗ is existentially chosen together with fff (the hard function has many minimizers when 2t+1<n2t+1<n2t+1<n, and the bound is false for some of them); the minimum over a ball is the bound against every point of the ball; fk∗f_k^*fk∗​ is the real infimum, asserted to be attained.

A formalization that let the function depend on the procedure, dropped x1=0x_1=0x1​=0, or took the span over gradients at points other than the queries would state a different and weaker theorem; the statements here keep fff (and the oracle) before the universally quantified procedure.

Infrastructure needed: quadratic forms of explicit matrices on EuclideanSpace, gradients of quadratics, and span/support lemmas for EuclideanSpace.single-type vectors. Contributions of proofs for any milestone, and of the strongly convex ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ lower bound (Theorem 3.15, not included here), are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1405.4980
  • A. Nemirovski and D. Yudin, Problem Complexity and Method Efficiency in Optimization, Wiley, 1983.
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity VII: Conditional Gradient Descent (Frank–Wolfe) with γ_s = 2/(s + 1) Has Rate 2βR²/(t + 1) in Any NormTextbook

Motivation

Many constrained optimization problems in machine learning and statistics have a feasible set X\mathcal XX over which a linear function is cheap to minimize but a Euclidean projection is expensive: the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-ball, the simplex, the nuclear-norm ball, the convex hull of a combinatorial family. Projected gradient descent needs a projection at every step. Conditional gradient descent, introduced by Frank and Wolfe in 1956 for quadratic programming, replaces the projection by a call to a linear minimization oracle over X\mathcal XX, and its iterates are convex combinations of oracle outputs, which makes them sparse when X\mathcal XX is a polytope.

This mission is the seventh of a series formalizing S. Bubeck's monograph Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning, 2015, arXiv:1405.4980v2). It covers Section 3.3, whose main result, Theorem 3.8, is the O(1/t)O(1/t)O(1/t) rate of the method in the form given by Jaggi (2013), going back to Dunn and Harshbarger (1978).

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. For a linear form ggg on EEE, written v↦g⊤vv\mapsto g^\top vv↦g⊤v, the dual norm is ∥g∥∗=sup⁡∥v∥≤1g⊤v\|g\|_*=\sup_{\|v\|\le1}g^\top v∥g∥∗​=sup∥v∥≤1​g⊤v. Let X⊆E\mathcal X\subseteq EX⊆E be nonempty, compact and convex, with diameter R=sup⁡x,y∈X∥x−y∥R=\sup_{x,y\in\mathcal X}\|x-y\|R=supx,y∈X​∥x−y∥.

Let f:E→Rf:E\to\mathbb Rf:E→R be differentiable with gradient ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x), a linear form on EEE. For β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0, fff is β-smooth with respect to ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ on X\mathcal XX if

∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥∗≤β∥x−y∥(x,y∈X).\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|_*\le\beta\|x-y\|\qquad(x,y\in\mathcal X).∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥∗​≤β∥x−y∥(x,y∈X).

A point x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X with f(x∗)=min⁡x∈Xf(x)f(x^*)=\min_{x\in\mathcal X}f(x)f(x∗)=minx∈X​f(x) is fixed throughout, and δt=f(xt)−f(x∗)\delta_t=f(x_t)-f(x^*)δt​=f(xt​)−f(x∗).

Given step sizes (γs)s≥1(\gamma_s)_{s\ge1}(γs​)s≥1​, a run of conditional gradient descent is a pair of sequences with x1∈Xx_1\in\mathcal Xx1​∈X and, for every t≥1t\ge1t≥1,

yt∈argmin⁡y∈X∇f(xt)⊤y(3.8),xt+1=(1−γt)xt+γtyt(3.9).y_t\in\operatorname*{argmin}_{y\in\mathcal X}\nabla f(x_t)^\top y\quad(3.8),\qquad x_{t+1}=(1-\gamma_t)x_t+\gamma_ty_t\quad(3.9).yt​∈y∈Xargmin​∇f(xt​)⊤y(3.8),xt+1​=(1−γt​)xt​+γt​yt​(3.9).

The minimizer yty_tyt​ need not be unique; any choice is allowed.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.8 (p. 272)

If fff is convex and β\betaβ-smooth with respect to ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ and γs=2s+1\gamma_s=\frac{2}{s+1}γs​=s+12​ for s≥1s\ge1s≥1, then every run satisfies, for every t≥2t\ge2t≥2,

f(xt)−f(x∗)≤2βR2t+1.f(x_t)-f(x^*)\le\frac{2\beta R^2}{t+1}.f(xt​)−f(x∗)≤t+12βR2​.

Milestones

  1. Inequality (3.4) in an arbitrary norm (p. 267, used on p. 272): for x,y∈Xx,y\in\mathcal Xx,y∈X, 0≤f(x)−f(y)−∇f(y)⊤(x−y)≤β2∥x−y∥20\le f(x)-f(y)-\nabla f(y)^\top(x-y)\le\frac{\beta}{2}\|x-y\|^20≤f(x)−f(y)−∇f(y)⊤(x−y)≤2β​∥x−y∥2.
  2. The one-step recursion (pp. 272–273): for any run with γs∈[0,1]\gamma_s\in[0,1]γs​∈[0,1],
δs+1≤(1−γs)δs+β2γs2R2.\delta_{s+1}\le(1-\gamma_s)\delta_s+\frac{\beta}{2}\gamma_s^2R^2 .δs+1​≤(1−γs​)δs​+2β​γs2​R2.
  1. Initialization (p. 273): if γ1=1\gamma_1=1γ1​=1, then δ2≤β2R2\delta_2\le\frac{\beta}{2}R^2δ2​≤2β​R2.
  2. The induction (p. 273): a real sequence with δ2≤β2R2\delta_2\le\frac{\beta}{2}R^2δ2​≤2β​R2 and the recursion of milestone 2 with γs=2s+1\gamma_s=\frac{2}{s+1}γs​=s+12​ for s≥2s\ge2s≥2 satisfies δt≤2βR2t+1\delta_t\le\frac{2\beta R^2}{t+1}δt​≤t+12βR2​ for t≥2t\ge2t≥2.

Significance

Theorem 3.8 is the basic guarantee for projection-free first-order optimization. Its rate does not depend on the dimension, and it depends on the geometry only through the product βR2\beta R^2βR2, both measured in the same norm, which may be chosen to fit X\mathcal XX: for the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-ball, smoothness in ∥⋅∥1\|\cdot\|_1∥⋅∥1​ with dual norm ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​ gives much better constants than the Euclidean analysis. The book applies it this way to a LASSO-type problem (Section 3.3, pp. 274–276), and the same bound underlies the sparse-approximation corollary on the simplex (p. 273) and the many later variants of the method (away steps, stochastic and online conditional gradient).

The result is classical and proved in the book. What this mission adds is a machine-checked statement and proof in an arbitrary finite-dimensional normed space, with the dual norm as the operator norm on linear forms, and a reusable encoding of norm-smoothness and of conditional gradient runs. On Prove2Me a related result is already proved: Lan's Theorem 7.1 (First-order and Stochastic Optimization Methods), which bounds f(yk)−f∗f(y_k)-f^*f(yk​)−f∗ by 2Lk(k+1)∑i≤k∥xi−yi−1∥2\frac{2L}{k(k+1)}\sum_{i\le k}\|x_i-y_{i-1}\|^2k(k+1)2L​∑i≤k​∥xi​−yi−1​∥2 with a different indexing; after the diameter bound it yields 2βR2/t2\beta R^2/t2βR2/t at Bubeck's iterate xtx_txt​, which is weaker than Theorem 3.8 by one step.

Difficulty

The difficulty is in the bookkeeping of norms and indices, not in a deep idea. Inequality (3.4) is proved in the book only for the Euclidean norm, where ∇f(x)∈Rn\nabla f(x)\in\mathbb R^n∇f(x)∈Rn and the Cauchy–Schwarz inequality is used; in a general norm it needs the pairing between a linear form and a vector and the bound ∣g⊤v∣≤∥g∥∗∥v∥|g^\top v|\le\|g\|_*\|v\|∣g⊤v∣≤∥g∥∗​∥v∥. The rate 2βR2/(t+1)2\beta R^2/(t+1)2βR2/(t+1) is attained only by starting the induction at t=2t=2t=2, where the step γ1=1\gamma_1=1γ1​=1 erases the dependence on the starting point; at t=1t=1t=1 the bound can fail, since δ1\delta_1δ1​ is arbitrary. A first attempt that runs the induction from t=1t=1t=1 with an arbitrary δ1\delta_1δ1​ does not give the stated constant.

Formalization scope

EEE is a type with [NormedAddCommGroup E] [NormedSpace ℝ E] [FiniteDimensional ℝ E]; nothing is specialised to the Euclidean norm. The gradient is an explicit derivative map f' : E → (E →L[ℝ] ℝ) with HasFDerivAt f (f' x) x for every x; ∇f(x)⊤v\nabla f(x)^\top v∇f(x)⊤v is f' x v, and ∥⋅∥∗\|\cdot\|_*∥⋅∥∗​ is the operator norm, which equals sup⁡∥v∥≤1g⊤v\sup_{\|v\|\le1}g^\top vsup∥v∥≤1​g⊤v. RRR is Metric.diam X, which equals the supremum of ∥x−y∥\|x-y\|∥x−y∥ over X\mathcal XX because X\mathcal XX is compact. Sequences are indexed by ℕ with the first iterate at index 1.

Committed conventions: X\mathcal XX compact, convex and containing x∗x^*x∗ (hence nonempty); convexity of fff and the Lipschitz bound on the gradient are assumed on X\mathcal XX only, which is weaker than the book's global assumptions; β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0; the existence of the minimizer x∗x^*x∗ is the book's standing assumption (p. 242); the conclusion is stated for t≥2t\ge2t≥2, as in the book. Runs are predicates: yty_tyt​ is any minimizer of the linear form over X\mathcal XX and yt∈Xy_t\in\mathcal Xyt​∈X is required, so the goal quantifies over every run with γs=2/(s+1)\gamma_s=2/(s+1)γs​=2/(s+1). A formalization in which yty_tyt​ need not lie in X\mathcal XX, or in which smoothness is assumed only along the iterates, states a different theorem and is excluded.

A complete development needs the descent inequality (3.4) for Fréchet derivatives in a normed space (reusable for every smooth method in the series and beyond), the fact that the iterates stay in X\mathcal XX, and a scalar induction. Proofs of the milestones are welcome independently; milestone 4 is a statement about real sequences only.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1405.4980
  • M. Frank and P. Wolfe, An algorithm for quadratic programming, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 3(1–2):95–110, 1956. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800030109
  • J. C. Dunn and S. Harshbarger, Conditional gradient algorithms with open loop step size rules, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 62(2):432–444, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(78)90137-3
  • M. Jaggi, Revisiting Frank–Wolfe: projection-free sparse convex optimization, Proceedings of ICML 2013, PMLR 28(1):427–435. https://proceedings.mlr.press/v28/jaggi13.html
  • G. Lan, First-order and Stochastic Optimization Methods for Machine Learning, Springer, 2020, Theorem 7.1. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-39568-1
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 13 of 23Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me